JP2013244227A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a player from losing his or her interest in a game, while setting a plural number in a limiter count.SOLUTION: When an internal drawing probability is low, a limiter count to be set when a jackpot is won in a non-time-saving state is set to be smaller than the limiter count to be set when the jackpot is won by a time-saving function. When a large limiter count is set, the number of openings of a jackpot port to be opened during a jackpot game executed before the limiter count becomes 0 is set to be small. When the limiter count is set to be small, the number of openings of the jackpot port to be opened during the jackpot game executed before the limiter count becomes 0 is set to be large.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a change of a symbol and then stops and displays the symbol in a manner that represents the result of the lottery.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, when a lottery result corresponds to winning, a big hit game is started after symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner representing winning. When this big hit game is started, the opening operation of the big prize opening is started, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. In addition, when a special condition is satisfied, a special gaming state (for example, a probable variation state (finished after 10000 variations display) or a time shortened state (a specified number of variations display) that is advantageous for a player who is likely to easily shift to the big hit gaming state. Some are configured to transition to)). In addition, when it transfers to a time shortening state, the frequency which a lottery opportunity generate | occur | produces will rise rather than usual, and it will be in the state which a ball has hardly decreased.

  In addition, in order to prevent the big hit gaming state from occurring continuously, specifically, in order to prevent the special gaming state from continuing for a long period of time, after the transition condition to the special gaming state is established, A prior art having a function (limiter setting function) for limiting the number of occurrences of a big hit gaming state (number of limiters) is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Therefore, once the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state is set, it is shown that the total number of winning balls that can be obtained during a plurality of big hit games executed until the set number of times is reached is almost fixed. .

JP 2008-284069 A

  However, in order to obtain the final number of winning balls, it is necessary to execute a jackpot game. For that purpose, it was necessary to generate lottery triggers and execute lottery until winning the jackpot . Here, if the number of limiters is set to be large, more lottery triggers must be generated and the lottery must be executed, and the player feels bored and impatient, which may reduce the interest in the game. Also, if the number of limiters is set to a small number, the number of held balls will decrease when it becomes difficult for lottery triggers to occur during the process (non-time shortened state), and there will be no prize balls acquired during the big hit game. , There was a risk of reducing interest in games. Therefore, the player's interest may be affected by the setting of the limiter count.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for preventing a decrease in the interest of a game in a state where a plurality of limiter times are set.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present invention is set in advance when a lottery trigger occurs during a game, and lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery and when the internal lottery is executed by the lottery execution means. It is possible to generate the winning from the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery after the symbols are variably displayed over the fluctuating time, and the closed state in which the winning cannot be generated. Variable winning means that performs an opening / closing operation that changes to an open state, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the result of the internal lottery is winning after the symbol display means is variably displayed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner, a special game executing means for executing a special game for performing the opening / closing operation by the variable winning means until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the internal drawing If the result of this is a win, whether a low probability state in which at least a normal winning probability is applied is set as the first internal state related to the winning probability of the internal lottery by the lottery execution means after the special game ends Or a probability state determination means for determining whether to set a high probability state to which a higher winning probability is applied compared to the low probability state, and after the end of the special game by the special game execution means, A special game that sets the state determined by the probability state determination means for the first internal state and corresponds to the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed for the second internal state related to the frequency of occurrence of the lottery trigger Until the number of post-variations reaches a specific number, the lottery is performed at a higher frequency than at least the non-time shortening state in which the lottery trigger occurs at a normal frequency. The special game state management means after completion of the special game is set to a time reduction state in which an opportunity can be generated, and the special time after the special time reduction state is set for the second internal state by the special game state management means after completion of the special game. When the post-game change count reaches the specified count, the post-change count game state management means for ending the time reduction state and setting the non-time reduction state for the second internal state, and the first internal state in advance Is set to the low probability state, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning while the second internal state is set to the non-time reduced state, the probability state determining means The determination of the first internal state is controlled so that the high probability state is continuously set until the first number of times is reached, and the high probability state is set continuously until the first number of times. After the determination is made, the first probability state determination control means for controlling the mode to set the low probability state, and the control by the first probability state determination control means, the probability state determination means by the probability state determination means As a result of the decision to set the low probability state after the decision to set the high probability state continuously up to the first number of times regarding the determination of the first internal state, gaming state management after the end of the special game When the first internal state is set to the low probability state by means, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a win while the second internal state is set to the time reduction state, The determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination means is controlled so that the high probability state is continuously set until the second number less than the first number is reached, and the previous number is continuously increased to the second number. After the determination to set the high probability state is made, the second probability state determination control means for controlling the mode to set the low probability state, and the first internal state is set to the low probability state in advance, And, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning while the second internal state is set to the non-time-reduced state, or due to the control by the first probability state determination control means, As a result of the decision to set the high probability state for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination means, the first internal state is set to the high probability state by the gaming state management means after the end of the special game. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, the number of times the opening / closing operation by the variable winning means is performed during the special game executed by the special game executing means is set to the first opening / closing number. Due to the control by the first opening / closing number setting means to be determined and the control by the first probability state determination control means, the high probability of the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination means up to the first number of times. As a result of the decision to set the low probability state after the decision to set the state is made, while the first internal state is set to the low probability state by the gaming state management means after the end of the special game When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, or due to the control by the second probability state determination control unit, the high probability state is set for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination unit. As a result of the determination, if the result of the internal lottery wins while the first internal state is set to the high probability state by the gaming state management means after the special game ends, Second opening / closing number setting means for setting the number of times the opening / closing operation by the variable winning means is performed during the special game executed by the special game execution means to a second opening / closing number that is greater than the first opening / closing number; It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, games and necessary operations are performed along the following flow.
(1) When a lottery trigger occurs during a gaming state in which the internal lottery probability is low and the variation time is non-time-shortened (occurrence of winning at the left starting prize opening), the internal lottery related to the player's profit The lottery element (big hit decision random number) necessary for execution of is acquired. In order to execute the internal lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a precondition. For this reason, the player plays a game with the first goal being to generate a prize at the left start prize winning port which becomes the lottery opportunity. A lottery opportunity occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly), and when a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time. Here, there is a right start prize opening in addition to the left start prize opening, but when the gaming state is not a time shortening state, the right start prize opening is difficult to open, so the first place is the left start prize opening. The game is played with the initial goal of generating. Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element, a variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determining random number) for determining which one to select from among a plurality of defined variation patterns is acquired. The variation pattern determination element is an element that determines the variation display mode of the special symbol. Here, the acquired lottery elements (and variation pattern determining elements) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four for each special symbol corresponding to each start winning award) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit. (The lottery element and the variation pattern determining element may be stored in the same storage area or may be stored in different storage areas, but are stored in association with each other.)

(2) A lottery element is acquired according to (1) above, and a start condition for starting the change display of the special symbol (for example, when the special symbol is not changing and the previous change has been made, the special symbol is stopped. Is satisfied, the stored lottery elements are consumed in the stored order, and an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(3) When the internal lottery is executed according to (2) above, the special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (variation time and stop display time) from when the special symbol's variable display is started to when it is stopped. Once the special symbol's variable display is started, the stop display is displayed. The next lottery will not be held until is completed. When the internal lottery is executed, the variation pattern is selectively determined based on the variation pattern determining element corresponding to the consumed lottery element.

(4) The change display effect (scroll display effect of the effect symbol) is executed within the change time of the special symbol (3) above, and the stop display effect (stop of the effect symbol) within the stop display time of (3) above. Display effect) is executed.

(5) When the result of the internal lottery according to (2) above is won, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the big hit in (3), the big hit game is started. During the big hit game, the variable winning device is opened and closed to change from the closed state to the open state, the big winning opening is opened, and a special winning can be generated.

(6) In addition, when the result of the internal lottery in (2) above is won, the right to play the jackpot game for a specified number of times (for example, 8 times) is generated (reach the specified number of times (8 times)). Until it is determined that the internal lottery probability is set to a high probability state). In addition, the upper limit number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in a time-reduced state (time reduction number) is set to a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Therefore, it is possible to win at the right start winning opening.

(7) Although the lottery probability of the internal lottery continues in a high probability state until the specified number of times (8 times) of big hit games set in (6) above is performed, a special symbol without starting the big hit game When the number of times of fluctuation display reaches the time shortening count (50 times), the non-time shortening state is set. Therefore, winning at the right start winning opening becomes difficult. If the big hit game is started before the special symbol variation display count is reduced (50 times), the time reduction count after the big hit is set to a larger number (eg, 10,000 times). .

(8) When the specified number (8) of big hit games set in (6) above is performed, the lottery probability of the internal lottery after the end of the big hit game is set to a low probability state, The number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

(9) When the big hit game is started before the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches the time reduction number (100 times) set in (9) above, the number of times different from (6) above (for example, 4 The right to play the big hit game is generated only once (the number of times that the lottery probability of the internal lottery is set to a high probability state is reached until the specified number of times (four times) is reached). Further, the number of time reductions is set to a larger number (for example, 10,000 times).

(10) During the bonus game of the specified number of times (4 times) set in (9) including the jackpot game of (9) above, the number of times that the big winning opening in (5) is opened is set to be large. During the jackpot game of the specified number of times (8 times) set in (7) including the jackpot game of (6) above, the number of times that the jackpot of (5) is opened is set less than that. The

  As described above, when the internal lottery probability is in the low probability state, if a big win is won in the non-time shortened state, a right to execute eight big hit games with a large number of limiter settings is generated. After that, even if the game is shifted from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state after the jackpot game ends, the chance to set the time reduction count to 10,000 times by winning the jackpot and winning the jackpot during the time reduction state ( The number of jackpot rights can be increased. Further, when the internal lottery probability is in a low probability state, if a big win is won in a time shortening state, a right to execute four big hit games with a small limiter setting number is generated. After that, it is unlikely that the time saving state will shift from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state after the big hit game, and since the number of rights is four times, it can be digested earlier than the time required for winning eight big hits. In addition, the number of times that the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game executed when the limiter is eight times as compared to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game executed when the limiter is eight times. Since many are set, it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of loss regarding the total number of prize balls. As described above, by setting the number of limiters differently based on whether the first big hit is in a time shortening state or a non-time shortening state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, and a new game characteristic A gaming machine having the same can be provided.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present invention further includes a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball when the occurrence of the winning is confirmed in the solution means 1, and the opening / closing frequency adjusting means is configured to perform the opening / closing operation. By adjusting the number of times, the total number of prize balls to be paid out by the prize ball payout means during the special game executed when determined by the control by the first probability state determination control means, The total number of prize balls to be paid out by the prize ball payout means during the special game executed when determined by the control by the second probability state determination control means is the same or approximate. Is a gaming machine characterized by

  According to this solution, for example, the number of times that the winning prize opening in (10) is opened is, for example, the specified number of times (4 times) big hit set in (9) including the big hit game in (9) above. During the game, the number of times the (5) big winning opening is opened is set to 16 times, and the number of times (8) specified in the above (7) including the big hit game of (6) is set. During the big hit game, the number of times the (5) big winning opening is opened is set to eight. As a result, the total number of winning balls by winning balls generated by winning at the big winning opening becomes almost the same number of winning balls. Specifically, since the product obtained by multiplying the number of big hit games and the number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the total number of prize balls, both represent almost the same number of prize balls. .

  In this way, even if the limiter count is set differently, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the total number of winning balls, so it is possible to eliminate the player's feeling of loss and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

  The present invention can provide a technique for preventing a decrease in interest in a game in a state where a plurality of limiter times are set.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board about several places. It is a figure which shows the structural example and operation example of a movable accessory apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big hit stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop special symbol selection 1st table at the time of non-special probability variation big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol selection 1st table at the time of special probability change big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol probability change big hit stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of a special normal big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol selection 2nd table at the time of special probability change big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol selection 1st table at the time of a non-special normal big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol selection 2nd table at the time of a non-special normal big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop special symbol selection 2nd table at the time of a non-special probability variation big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop special symbol selection 3rd table at the time of non-special probability variation big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a limiter frequency setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state operation frequency setting table. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in a pachinko machine. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation variation effect by a design symbol, a reach production, and a stop display production (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation production | presentation by a design symbol, a reach production, and a stop display production (2/3). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation fluctuation variation effect, reach effect, and stop display effect by an effect design (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (1/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (2/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (3/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (4/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (5/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (6/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (7/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (8/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (9/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (10/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (11/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (12/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (13/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (14/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (15/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (16/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (17/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (18/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (19/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (20/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (21/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (22/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (23/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (24/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (25/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (26/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (27/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (28/29). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding a limiter (29/29). It is the figure explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired during a big hit game from the time of a special symbol low probability state (when a limiter is set) to the time when the limiter is reached (part 1). It is the figure explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired during a big hit game from the time of a special symbol low probability state (at the time of limiter setting) to the time of reaching the limiter (part 2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the opening process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the ending process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production symbol stop display time reduction state setting process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (benefits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game is, for example, a game acquired by the player. The game value can be converted based on the number of balls. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as a ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board 8 as a game unit. The game board 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. For example, the glass unit is a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Further, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower tray ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 6).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. In the game area 8a, a left start winning port 26, a start gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 25, a variable start winning device 28, a variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed around the effect unit 40. . Among these, the left start winning opening 6 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20 is located near the upper part in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning openings 22 are located on the left side of the game area 8a and on the lower side thereof. Another remaining normal winning opening 25 is located on the right side of the game area 8a, and is located below the starting gate 20, and a variable starting winning device 28 is disposed directly below. The variable winning device 30 is located on the lower side of the right side of the game area 8a, and is arranged side by side to the right of the left start winning port 26.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the left start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22 and 25 (wins), or at the time of operation. Or a variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation is won (winned). Note that the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8a may mainly enter (win) the left start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22 (win). The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the normal winning opening 25 (win), or at the time of the variable start winning device 28 or the opening operation. There is a possibility of winning (winning) a ball in the variable winning device 30. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but enter (win) the left start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30. The game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board 8).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the ball into the right start winning opening 28a (winning) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28b, and these opening / closing members 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28b are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the ball into the right start winning opening 28a (winning) ( (There is no gap through which game balls can flow). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right open / close members 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right start winning opening 28a is opened by expanding the opening width to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where game balls can flow in, and can generate a winning (winning) to the right start winning opening 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning port 28a at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning port 28a) at the time of the opening operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  The variable prize winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed for a prescribed stop display time in a mode other than non-winning), and a big prize opening (not shown). ) (Special electric accessory). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a also reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the big prize opening (the big prize opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible, that is, in an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball, and can generate an event (lottery opportunity) of winning a big winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening. Here, similarly, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable winning device 30 (the large winning opening at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board 8. In addition, all of the game balls 8 that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port). The game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. A first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

  Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). The display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Further, the special symbol display device 34 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means). Since one special symbol is used in this embodiment, it is sufficient to provide one 7-segment LED as the special symbol display device 34. However, as shown in FIG. By mounting, the same hardware configuration (integrated display substrate 89) can be applied to other models using two special symbols. In the present embodiment, the working memory lamp and the working memory number display device corresponding to the special symbol are not provided. One special symbol may be displayed by two 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  The game state display device 38 includes, for example, five LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38c, 38d, and 38e, the probability variation state display lamp 38a, the short-time state display lamp 38b, and the right-handed display lamp 38f. Yes. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are attached to the game board 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m enhance the decorativeness of the game board 8 by their three-dimensional modeling, and perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). be able to. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. As described above, the game board 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the left start winning port 26. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is discharged from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the left start winning port 26 just below it (however, it does not always pass). Absent.).

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited.

  Next, the configuration of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and an operation example of the movable accessory device. Here, FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302, and FIG. 5B is an operation of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302. It is a figure which shows an example.

[Configuration of movable accessory device 301]
As shown in FIG. 5A, the movable accessory device 301 (movable body driving means) includes a right shutter unit 310, a right shutter moving mechanism 340 that is a mechanism for moving the right shutter unit 310, It has the attachment member 360 for attaching these members.
The right shutter unit 310 has a configuration in which a light emitting unit 312 (movable body) having a right half heart-shaped frame shape is disposed on the surface of a U-shaped transparent substrate 311. A guide portion 315 protrudes upward from the upper portion of the transparent substrate 311. The light emitting unit 312 has a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs and lamps embedded therein.
A guide rail 361 into which the guide portion 315 is slidably (slidably) inserted is provided on the upper portion of the attachment member 360.

The right shutter moving mechanism 340 includes a motor M3 fixed on the back side of the lower portion of the attachment member 360, a motor gear 341 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor M3, and the motor gear 341, and is provided below the attachment member 360. It has an intermediate gear 342 rotatably provided on the provided shaft, and a moving part 343 fixed to the lower part of the attachment member 360.
The moving portion 343 includes a sawtooth-like tooth row portion 344 meshed with the intermediate gear 342, and a guide groove 345 extending through the shaft provided in the mounting member 360 and extending in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower part of the right shutter part 310 is fixed to the upper part of the moving part 343.
Therefore, when the motor M3 is rotationally driven, the rotational force is transmitted to the intermediate gear 342 via the motor gear 341, and the rotational force of the intermediate gear 342 is converted into a lateral force at the tooth row portion 344, The moving unit 343 is moved in the left-right direction.
Accordingly, the right shutter portion 310 fixed to the moving portion 343 moves in the left-right direction along the guide groove 345 and the guide rail 361 according to the rotation direction of the motor M3.

[Configuration of movable accessory device 302]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5A, the movable accessory device 302 (movable body driving means) includes a left shutter portion 320, a left shutter moving mechanism 350 for moving the left shutter portion 320, and these This is a member for attaching the movable member device 301 and the common attachment member 360.
The left shutter unit 320 has a configuration in which a light emitting unit 322 (movable body) having a left half heart-shaped frame shape is disposed on the surface of a transparent substrate 321 having a shape obtained by horizontally inverting the transparent substrate 311. . A guide portion 325 protrudes upward from the upper portion of the transparent substrate 321. The guide portion 325 is slidably inserted into a guide rail 361 disposed on the upper portion of the attachment member 360. The light emitting unit 322 has a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs and lamps embedded therein.

The left shutter moving mechanism 350 includes a motor M4 fixed to the back side of the lower portion of the attachment member 360, a motor gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor M4, and the motor gear 351, and is provided below the attachment member 360. An intermediate gear 352 rotatably provided on the shaft is provided, and a moving portion 353 fixed to the lower portion of the attachment member 360.
The moving part 353 has a sawtooth-shaped tooth row part 354 meshed with the intermediate gear 352, and a guide groove 355 through which a shaft provided in the mounting member 360 is inserted and extends in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower part of the left shutter part 320 is fixed to the upper part of the moving part 353.
Therefore, when the motor M4 is rotationally driven, the rotational force is transmitted to the intermediate gear 352 via the motor gear 351, and the rotational force of the intermediate gear 352 is converted into a lateral force in the tooth row portion 354, The moving unit 353 is moved in the left-right direction.
Accordingly, the left shutter portion 320 fixed to the moving portion 353 moves in the left-right direction along the guide groove 355 and the guide rail 361 according to the rotation direction of the motor M4.

A photo sensor 760 is provided at the lower right end of the mounting member 360, and an index rib 770 that is a detected portion of the photo sensor 760 is provided on the right side surface of the moving unit 343.
The photosensor 760 includes a light irradiation unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light irradiation unit, and the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit are disposed to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Yes.

  The light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit of the photo sensor 760 and the index rib 770 are located between the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit when the moving unit 343 is at the maximum movement position (reference position) in the right direction. It is inserted and it will be in the state which interrupts | blocks the light irradiated from a light irradiation part to a light-receiving part. Therefore, the effect control device 124 determines that the right shutter unit 310 is at the reference position when the photosensor 760 is in the light shielding state (when a detection signal indicating that the light shielding state is received from the photosensor 760). can do.

A photosensor 780 is provided at the lower left end of the mounting member 360, and an index rib 790 that is a detected portion of the photosensor 780 is provided on the left side surface of the moving unit 353. Note that the photosensor 780 is a sensor having the same configuration as the photosensor 760.
The light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit of the photosensor 780 and the index rib 790 are located between the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit when the moving unit 353 is at the maximum leftward movement position (reference position). It is inserted and it will be in the state which interrupts | blocks the light irradiated from a light irradiation part to a light-receiving part. Therefore, the effect control device 124 determines that the left shutter unit 320 is at the reference position when the photosensor 780 is in the light shielding state (when the detection signal indicating that the light sensor is in the light shielding state is received from the photosensor 780). can do.

[Operation example of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302]
Here, when the right shutter unit 310 moves to the left and the left shutter unit 320 moves to the right by the rotational drive of the motor M3 and the motor M4, as shown in FIG. Move in the closing direction (the direction approaching each other). When both shutter parts move to the maximum movement position, the light emitting part 312 and the light emitting part 322 are finally combined to form one heart shape.

  The movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302 are driven, for example, in an effect process such as a reach effect, a state non-disclosure effect, or a state disclosure effect, and a change in form due to the movement of the right shutter unit 310 and the left shutter unit 320, The fun of the game can be improved by the combination of the lighting states of the light emitting units 312 and 322.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board 8 is also provided with a left start winning port switch 80, a right start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the left start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. . Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the left start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number thereof as described above. Similarly, the game board 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 25. Here, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is described as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball is detected for the normal winning holes 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and a winning ball switch 86 on the right side detects a winning of the game ball for the normal winning hole 25 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. , Wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals are provided.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed on the game board 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  Although not specifically illustrated, the game board 8 is also provided with a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor. Among these sensors, the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic flux flying to the game board 8 at the installation position, and the density ( A detection signal corresponding to the magnetic intensity is output. The vibration sensor detects an acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. The detection signals of these magnetic sensors and vibration sensors are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, for example.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 126 can be of a type that is faster (high clock frequency) than the main control CPU 72 and has a wide data bus width (for example, 64 bits). The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134, and various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board surface. Processing is performed to cause the lamp 53 to emit light or to actually output sound effects, voices, or the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. , 48, 50, 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. In addition, the above-described effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136, and when the player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45, a contact signal (during the push operation) or a rotation angle signal ( (At the time of rotation operation) is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board 8 and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. When an LED array is used for the backlight, an LED drive board (not shown) can be installed instead of the inverter board 158. Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, and 56, and the movable body 40f as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Control is included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (for example, 24-bit color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. ) Individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  7 and 8 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 8 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, hit determination random numbers corresponding to ordinary symbols, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) are generated on the program. ing. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 10). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 10). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 75, and its update cycle is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial value of the jackpot determination random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 10). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 7).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the left starting winning port switch 80, right starting winning port switch 82, count switch 84, and winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the left start winning port switch 80, and the right starting winning port switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the left start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the left start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 10). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the left start winning port switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event occurs). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 10).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the random number counter area for variation in the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (lottery element storage means, variation Get pattern determinants). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is in operation of the time reduction function or whether it is a big hit. If the time reduction function is not in operation other than the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the time reduction function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. Also, except during the big hit, when both the working memory of the first special symbol and the working memory of the second special symbol remain, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) This is because the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency particularly during the operation of the time shortening function. In addition, while the time shortening function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 25/251 → about 249/251), and In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when not in operation → 2 .5 seconds), and the number of times of release increases (for example, increases from 1 to 2 when not in operation), so that the game ball can be fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable) As long as the change of the second special symbol is prioritized, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) unless the start winning device 28 is interrupted for a period of time until the operation is stopped. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into two steps, for example, step S36a for determining “time reduction function in operation” and step S36b for determining “big hit”.

  Step S37: When the current game management state (internal state) is other than the big hit and the time reduction function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. To do. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 12), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (the lottery element storage means, the variation pattern determination element Acquisition). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is only determined whether or not the big hit is in the previous step S45a, and the operating state of the variable time reduction function is not determined in the first embodiment in the game other than the big hit as described above. In order to change the second special symbol over the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol regardless of the operating state of the variable time shortening function except during the big hit. This is because it can be used for prefetching. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 12, step S46 in FIG. 13) (predetermined determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the left start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects the variation time (or variation pattern number) and determination information regarding the presence or absence of reach variation. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The comparative value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No). Next, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described deviation pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes big hit hour fluctuation pattern information preliminary determination processing (fluctuation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule (No Then, step S64 is executed to set a comparative value for high probability.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has not yet started the variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the start condition (first start condition, second The main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination assuming that the start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit of 8 rounds, an opportunity to shift from a normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management processing, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted), for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 4, 8, or 16 times). The variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is 8 in total, these may be collectively referred to as “8 rounds”. In the present embodiment, not only the 8-round jackpot type but also a plurality of types of 4-round jackpots and 16 round jackpots are provided. In addition, for the 8-round jackpot, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the special symbol fluctuation time is a normal length (for example, about 2 to 12 seconds depending on the total stored number; except for the case where the reach fluctuation is performed. ) Is shifted to a state set to a length (for example, about 1.5 seconds) in which the variation time is shortened compared to the non-time shortened state. In addition, while the time reduction function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery has a high probability (for example, low probability of about 25/251 → about 249/251). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when inactive → 2. Since it is extended to about 5 seconds), and the number of times of opening increases (for example, it increases from 1 to 2 when it is not in operation), the game ball is fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable start) The operation memory of the second special symbol is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) as long as it is not interrupted for a period of time that the winning device 28 stops operating). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the “8 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “8 rounds probable big hit” and (2) “8 round normal (non-probable) big hit” are provided as a plurality of winning types (this) There may be more). In addition to “8 round big hits”, in this embodiment, for example, (3) “4 rounds probable big hits”, (4) “4 rounds normal big hits”, (5) “16 rounds” “Probable big hit” and (6) “16 round normal big hit” are provided (there may be more).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “8 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “8 round probability variation symbol”, and “8 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “8 round regular symbol”. In addition, “4 rounds probable big hit” corresponds to the big hit of “4 rounds probable symbol”, “4 rounds normal big hit” corresponds to the big hit of “4 rounds normal symbol”, “16 rounds probable big hit” is “16 rounds” Corresponding to the jackpot of “probable variation”, “16 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round normal symbol”. For this reason, in the following description, “winning type” is appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[8 round normal design, 16 round normal design]
First, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “8 round normal symbol” or “16 round normal symbol” in the special symbol stop display process, the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state Occurs (special game execution means). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this is the eighth round (8 round normal symbol) or 16 Continue to the round (16 round normal symbol). For this reason, the “8-round normal symbol” jackpot game gives 8 rounds (prize balls) to the player, and the “16-round normal symbol” jackpot game has 16 rounds ( Award ball) is given to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[8-round probability variation design, 16-round probability variation design]
Alternatively, in the previous special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “8 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol”, there is an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state. Generated (special game execution means). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this is the eighth round (8-round probability variation pattern) or 16 Continue to round (16th round probability variation). These “8 round probability variation symbols” and “16 round probability variation symbols” jackpot games also give the player 8 balls or 16 rounds (prize balls) respectively. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game is finished, the “variable time reduction state” is also achieved. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player.

[4 rounds probable variation]
Alternatively, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “4-round probability variation symbol” in the special symbol stop display processing, the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs (special). Game execution means). However, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 8-round jackpot game and the 16-round jackpot game, there is almost no winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game of “4-round probabilistic symbol” is completed within a short period of time without giving substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “4 rounds probable variation”, for example, the “probability variation function” is activated after the end of the big hit game, and as a result, the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” Granted to a person. Such a “4-round probability variation pattern” gives the player the impression that a “high probability state” has suddenly occurred without going through a clear big hit game. Here, an example is given in which the opening time is set to an extremely short time, but even in a big round game of 4 rounds, for example, a plurality of (for example, about 9) game balls are won in one round. It is good also as setting sufficient open time which becomes possible. In this case, the player can enjoy the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” after giving a privilege of paying out a certain amount of prize balls.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “16-round probability variation symbol”, “8-round probability variation symbol” or “4-round probability variation symbol”, the internal state is changed to “high probability state” after the big hit game ends. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to any of the “16 round probability variation symbol”, “8 round probability variation symbol”, or “4 round probability variation symbol”, the jackpot game The “high probability state” continues (restarts) even after the end. On the other hand, if you win the internal lottery in the “high probability state” and fall into the above “16 round normal symbol”, “8 round normal symbol” or “4 round normal symbol”, the internal state is the normal probability state after the big hit game ends Return to (low probability state).

[4 round normal design]
Alternatively, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “4-round normal symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs (special Game execution means). However, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 8-round jackpot game and the 16-round jackpot game, there is almost no winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the “four-round normal symbol” jackpot game is completed within a short period of time without giving a substantial ball (prize ball) to the player. Such “4-round normal symbol” has the significance of terminating the “high probability state”. Here, an example is given in which the opening time is set to an extremely short time, but even in a big round game of 4 rounds, for example, a plurality of (for example, about 9) game balls are won in one round. It is good also as setting sufficient open time which becomes possible. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game executing means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (Game) is executed (in this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small winning game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), but hardly wins in the big winning opening as in the 4-round big winning game. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached).

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next special symbol determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10). It will be. When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). Even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is shortened based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 seconds) The number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → about 2.0 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 14) (the same applies to the big hit).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pretreatment]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, there are roughly six types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The six types are “4 round normal symbol”, “4 round probability variable symbol”, “8 round normal symbol”, “8 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol”. Each of the six types of winning symbols further includes a plurality of winning symbols. Specifically, if “4 round normal symbol”, “4 round normal symbol 1”, “4 round normal symbol 2”, “4 round probability variable symbol”, “4 round probability variable symbol 1”, “ For example, “4 round probability variation 2”, “4 round probability variation 3”, “4 round probability variation 4”. Similarly, the “8 round normal symbol”, “8 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol” include a plurality of winning symbols.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different in the type of winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each. That is, at the time of the big win of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, “4 round normal symbol”, “4 round probability variable symbol”, “8 round normal symbol”, “8 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, One of “16 round probability variation symbols” is selected.
On the other hand, at the time of the big win of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, “8 round normal symbol”, “8 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol” will be selected, “4 round normal symbol” and “4 round probability variable symbol” are not selected. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the objects that can be selected as the winning symbol depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  The specific contents of the big hit stop symbol determining process for determining the winning symbol at the time of the big hit will be described later using a further flowchart.

[Big hit stop symbol determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit stop symbol determination process. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S2450: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the lottery probability of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol in the current gaming state is in a high probability state. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored special symbol probability state flag (probability variation function operation flag), and the value is a value (01H) representing a high probability state. Check if it exists. As a result of the confirmation, when the lottery probability of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol in the current gaming state is in a high probability state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2451. On the other hand, when the lottery probability of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol in the current gaming state is not the high probability state (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2452.

  Step S2451: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol probability changing big hit stop symbol determination process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the jackpot has been performed a predetermined number of times for the type of winning symbol when the internal lottery probability related to the special symbol is in a high probability state (so-called limiter number has been reached). Or), a process of selectively determining based on whether or not the gaming state is in a time saving state or a special state is executed. The specific contents of the special symbol probability change big hit stop symbol determination process will be described later using another flowchart. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 16).

  Step S2452: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a time reduction state. That is, whether the current gaming state is a special symbol variation time is shortened, the normal symbol lottery probability is a high probability state, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and whether or not the electric chew support state Check. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the saved time reduction state flag (time reduction function operation flag), and the value is a value (01H) representing the time reduction state. Check whether or not. As a result of the confirmation, when the current gaming state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2461. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the time shortening state (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2454.

  Step S2454: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the type of the special symbol that is currently being processed is the second special symbol. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of the special symbol being processed is the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2461. On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol that is currently being processed is not the second special symbol but the first special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2456.

  Step S2456: The main control CPU 72 sets the special high-speed digestion state to OFF. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76 and resets the flag value of the special high-speed digestion state (sets the value to 00H).

  Here, the special high-speed digestion state represents a setting state of the upper limit number (limiter) of the number of times that can be continuously transferred to the “high probability state” and the number of jackpot rounds in the jackpot game. Specifically, as described later, when the special high-speed digestion state is ON (flag value is 01H), the upper limit number (limiter) is set to 3 times, and the number of big hit rounds is set to 16 rounds, and the special high-speed digestion state is OFF. When the flag value is 00H, the upper limit number (limiter) is set to 7 times, and the number of big hit rounds is set to 8 rounds at maximum. Therefore, even if the special high-speed digestion state is ON or OFF, a total of 64 rounds (ON: 4 times x 16 rounds, OFF: 8 times x 8 rounds (maximum) In this case, it means that the number of prize balls can be acquired.

  However, the game time required to win the above 64 rounds of winning balls after the first big hit is the special symbol internal lottery (high probability state) when the special high-speed digestion state is ON. On the other hand, if the special fast digestion state is ON, it is necessary to win 7 big wins in the special symbol internal lottery (high probability state). That is, if one side (when the special high-speed digestion state is ON) in the same high probability state needs to be changed a predetermined number of times to win three times, the other (special high-speed digestion state is OFF) If there is a special symbol, it is necessary to change the special symbol more times (for example, twice or more). Therefore, the fact that the special high-speed digestion state is ON represents that the game speed can be increased by about twice compared to the case where it is OFF.

  Accordingly, the gaming state when winning the big hit this time is a low probability state (step S2450: No), a non-time-reduced state (step S2452: No), and corresponding to the first special symbol If (Step S2454: No), the special high-speed digestion state is set to OFF (flag value is 00H). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2457.

  Step S2457: The main control CPU 72 sets the limiter count setting flag to OFF. Specifically, the flag area of the RAM 76 is accessed to reset the limiter count setting flag value (set the value to 00H).

  Here, the limiter count setting flag represents a flag for setting the upper limit count (limiter) of the number of times that can be continuously shifted to the “high probability state” to 3 times or 7 times. . Specifically, as described later, when the limiter count setting flag is ON (flag value is 01H), the upper limit count (limiter) is set to 3 times, and the limiter count setting flag is OFF (flag value is 00H). In some cases, the upper limit number (limiter) is set to 7 times.

  Accordingly, the gaming state when winning the big hit this time is a low probability state (step S2450: No), a non-time-reduced state (step S2452: No), and corresponding to the first special symbol If (Step S2454: No), the limiter count setting flag is set to OFF (flag value is 00H). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2459.

  Step S2459: The main control CPU 72 refers to the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table. This non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table will be further described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2466.

  Step S2461: The main control CPU 72 sets the special high-speed digestion state to ON. Specifically, the flag area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the flag value of the special high-speed digestion state is set (the value is set to 01H). Therefore, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the low probability state (step S2450: No) and the time shortening state (step S2452: Yes), or corresponding to the second special symbol ( In the case of step S2454: Yes), the special high-speed digestion state is set to ON (flag value is 01H). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2462.

  Step S2462: The main control CPU 72 sets the limiter count setting flag to ON. Specifically, the flag area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the limiter count setting flag value is set (value is set to 01H). Therefore, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the low probability state (step S2450: No) and the time shortening state (step S2452: Yes), or corresponding to the second special symbol ( In the case of step S2454: Yes), the limiter count setting flag is set to ON (flag value is 01H). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2464.

  Step S2464: The main control CPU 72 refers to the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table. This special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection first table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table will be described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2466.

  Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 selectively determines a stop symbol. Specifically, the stop symbol (winning symbol) is based on the big hit symbol stop symbol selection table referred to in the previous process (step S2459 or step S2464) and the big hit symbol random number read in the previous process (step S2200). Is selectively determined. Further, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from one of the big-hit stop symbol selection tables, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number based on the selected winning symbol.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 16).

[Non-special probability variation big stop symbol selection first table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first table for stopping symbol selection at non-special probability variation big hit. The main control CPU 72 is in a low probability state (step S2450: No), a non-time-reduced state (step S2452: No), and the first special symbol in the game state when winning the big hit this time. If it is the corresponding one (step S2454: No), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the non-special probability variable big stop symbol selection first table shown in FIG. When the special symbol type is the second special symbol, this table is not referred to.

  Non-special probable big hit stop symbol selection In the first table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. Values are shown. When the special symbol type is the first special symbol, each of the distribution values “30”, “30”, and “40” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. In the third column from the left, “4 round probability variation 1 (4 round probability variation symbol 1)”, “4 round probability variation 2 (4 round probability variation symbol 2)”, “8 round probability variation corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. 1 (8-round probability variation 2) "is shown. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, the ratio of selecting “4 round probability variation 1” is 30/100 (= 30%), and “4 round probability variation 2”. The ratio at which “8” is selected is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio at which “8 round probability variation 1” is selected is 40/100 (= 40%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, it indicates that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game ends.

  In any case, if the game state at the time of winning the current big hit is the above condition, the main control CPU 72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and is shown in the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table. The winning symbol is selectively determined by the selection ratio. Further, in the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, and “02H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “4 round probability variation 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” Will be.

[Special Probability Big Hit Stop Symbol Selection First Table]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a special probability change big hit stop symbol selection first table. The main control CPU 72 is in a low-probability state (step S2450: No) and a time-reduced state (step S2452: Yes), or corresponds to the second special symbol when winning the big hit this time. If it is to be performed (step S2454: Yes), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table shown in FIG.

  Special probability variation big stop stop symbol selection In the first table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution value by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. It is shown. Since each distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol, “16 round probability variation 1 (16 round probability variation 1)” is selected, and when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, “16 round probability variation 1”. 2 (16 round probability variation 2) "is selected. Therefore, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, it indicates that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game ends.

  In any case, when the game state at the time of winning the current big win is the above condition, the winning symbols shown in the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table are selectively determined. Further, in the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection first table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Further, the EVENT value “03H” in the lower byte represents the type of the winning symbol corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “16 round probability variation 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B2H03H” Will be.

[Special symbol probing / big hit stop symbol determination process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol probability changing big hit stop symbol determination process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S2470: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special high-speed digestion state is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored flag value of the special fast digestion state, and checks whether it is set (flag value is 01H). . As a result of this confirmation, when the special high-speed digestion state is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2472. On the other hand, when the special high-speed digestion state is not ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2473.

  Step S2472: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the number of limiters is one. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the limiter area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored number of limiters, and confirms whether or not the value corresponds to one time. That is, in this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the limiter is reached in the current big hit game. If the result of this confirmation is that the limiter count is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2480. On the other hand, when the number of limiters is not one (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2481.

  Step S2473: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the limiter count is 1 as in the previous step S2472. If the result of this confirmation is that the limiter count is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2475. On the other hand, when the number of limiters is not one (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2476.

  Step S2475: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is a time shortening state. That is, whether the current gaming state is a special symbol variation time is shortened, the normal symbol lottery probability is a high probability state, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and whether or not the electric chew support state Check. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the saved time reduction state flag (time reduction function operation flag), and the value is a value (01H) representing the time reduction state. Check whether or not. As a result of this confirmation, when the current gaming state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2483. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the time shortening state (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2484.

  Step S2476: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening state, similarly to the previous step S2475. As a result of the confirmation, when the current gaming state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2486. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the time shortening state (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2487.

  Step S2480: The main control CPU 72 refers to the special normal big hit stop symbol selection table. This special normal big hit stop symbol selection table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the special normal big hit stop symbol selection table will be described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2481: The main control CPU 72 refers to the special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection second table. The special probability variation big stop symbol selection second table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table will be described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2483: The main control CPU 72 refers to the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table. This non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table will be described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2484: The main control CPU 72 refers to the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table. The non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table will be described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2486: The main control CPU 72 refers to the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table. This non-special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection second table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table will be further described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2487: The main control CPU 72 refers to the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection third table. This non-special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection third table is stored in advance in the buffer area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the table by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection third table will be further described later with reference to another drawing. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2490.

  Step S2490: The main control CPU 72 selectively determines a stop symbol. Specifically, the big hit stop symbol selection table referenced in the previous process (step S2480, step S2481, step S2483, step S2484, step S2486, or step S2487) and the previous process (step S2200) are read. A stop symbol (winning symbol) is selectively determined based on the jackpot symbol random number. Further, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from one of the big-hit stop symbol selection tables, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number based on the selected winning symbol.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 16).

[Special normal big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special normal big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is ON (step S2470: Yes), and the number of limiters is one when the big win is won. If it is (step S2472: Yes), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the special normal jackpot stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the special normal big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution value for each winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. Has been. Since each distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol, “16 round normal symbol 1 (16 round normal symbol 1)” is selected, and when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, “16 round normal symbol”. 2 (16 round normal symbol 2) "is selected. Therefore, if the game state at the time of winning the big jackpot is the above condition, it means that the game shifts to a special symbol low probability state after the big jackpot game ends.

  In any case, if the game state at the time of winning the current big hit is the above condition, the winning symbol shown in the special normal big hit stop symbol selection table is selectively determined. In the special normal big hit stop symbol selection table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Further, the EVENT value “04H” in the lower byte represents the type of winning symbol corresponding to each in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “16 round normal 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B2H04H” Will be.

[Special probability variation big stop stop symbol selection second table]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection second table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is ON (step S2470: Yes), and the number of limiters is one when the big win is won. If not (step S2472: No), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the special probability variable big stop symbol selection second table shown in FIG.

  In the second table of the special probability variable big-stop symbol selection second table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution value by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. It is shown. Since each distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol, “16 round probability variation 3 (16 round probability variation 3)” is selected, and when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, “16 round probability variation 3”. 4 (16-round probability variation 4) "is selected. Therefore, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, it indicates that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game ends.

  In any case, when the game state at the time of winning the current big win is the above condition, the winning symbols shown in the special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table are selectively determined. Also, in the special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection second table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Also, the EVENT value “05H” in the lower byte represents the type of the winning symbol corresponding to each in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “16 round probability variation 4” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B2H05H” Will be.

[Non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is OFF (step S2470: No), and the limiter count is 1 (step) (step S2470: Yes). S2473: Yes) and the time-reduced state (step S2475: Yes), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the non-special normal big stop symbol selection first table shown in FIG. To do.

  Non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection In the first table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. Values are shown. Since each distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol, “8 round normal symbol 1 (8 round normal symbol 1)” is selected, and when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, “8 round normal symbol”. 2 (8 round normal symbol 2) "is selected. Therefore, if the game state at the time of winning the big jackpot is the above condition, it means that the game shifts to a special symbol low probability state after the big jackpot game ends.

  In any case, if the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot is the above condition, the winning symbol shown in the non-special normal jackpot stop symbol selection first table is selectively determined. In addition, in the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection first table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Further, the EVENT value “06H” in the lower byte represents the type of the winning symbol corresponding to each in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “8 round normal 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B2H06H” Will be.

[Non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is OFF (step S2470: No), and the limiter count is 1 (step) (step S2470: Yes). S2473: Yes) and in the non-time shortened state (step S2475: No), refer to the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table shown in FIG. decide.

  Non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection In the second table, the left column shows the types of special symbols, and the second column from the left shows the allocation by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbols. Values are shown. When the special symbol type is the first special symbol, each of the distribution values “30”, “30”, and “40” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. When the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, since the distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. In the third column from the left, “4 round normal 1 (4 round normal symbol 1)”, “4 round normal 2 (4 round normal symbol 2)”, “8 round normal” corresponding to each distribution value. 3 (8 round normal symbol 3) "and" 8 round normal symbol 4 (8 round normal symbol 4) "are shown. That is, when the game state when winning the big hit this time is the above condition, the ratio of “4 rounds normal 1” selected is 30/100 (= 30%), and “4 rounds normal 2” The ratio at which “8” is selected is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio at which “8 rounds normal 3” is selected is 40/100 (= 40%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, if the game state at the time of winning the big jackpot is the above condition, it means that the game shifts to a special symbol low probability state after the big jackpot game ends.

  In any case, if the game state at the time of winning the current big hit is the above condition, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and is shown in the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table. The winning symbol is selectively determined by the selection ratio. Further, in the non-special normal big hit stop symbol selection second table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Further, the EVENT values “07H”, “08H”, and “09H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and when “4 round normal 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H07H” Will be.

[Non-special probability variable big stop symbol selection second table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a non-special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection second table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is OFF (step S2470: No), and the limiter count is 1 (step) (step S2470: Yes). If it is not S2473: No) and is in a time-reduced state (step S2476: Yes), the type of winning symbol is determined with reference to the non-special probability variable big stop symbol selection second table shown in FIG. To do.

  Non-special probable big hit stop symbol selection In the second table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the allocation by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. Values are shown. Since each distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol, “8 round probability variation 2 (8 round probability variation 2)” is selected, and when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, “8 round probability variation”. 3 (8-round probability variation 3) "is selected. Therefore, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, it indicates that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game ends.

  In any case, when the game state at the time of winning the current big win is the above condition, the winning symbols shown in the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table are selectively determined. In addition, in the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection second table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. Further, the EVENT value “10H” in the lower byte represents the type of winning symbol corresponding to each in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “8 round probability variation 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B2H10H” Will be.

[Non-special probability variable big stop symbol selection third table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a non-special probability variation big hit stop symbol selection third table. The main control CPU 72 has a high probability state (step S2450: Yes), a special high-speed digestion state is OFF (step S2470: No), and the limiter count is 1 (step) (step S2470: Yes). If it is not S2473: No) and it is in the non-time-reduced state (step S2476: No), the type of winning symbol is selected with reference to the non-special probability variable big-hit stop symbol selection third table shown in FIG. decide.

  Non-special probable big hit stop symbol selection In the third table, the left column shows the type of special symbol, and the second column from the left shows the distribution by winning symbol corresponding to each type of special symbol. Values are shown. When the special symbol type is the first special symbol, each of the distribution values “30”, “30”, and “40” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. When the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, since the distribution value is “100”, the corresponding winning symbol is forcibly selected. In the third column from the left, “4 round probability variation 3 (4 round probability variation design 3)”, “4 round probability variation 4 (4 round probability variation design 4)”, “8 round probability variation corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. 4 (8 round probability variation 4) "and" 8 round probability variation 4 (8 round probability variation 5) "are shown. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, the ratio of “4 round probability variation 3” is 30/100 (= 30%), and “4 round probability variation 4”. The ratio at which “8” is selected is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio at which “8 round probability variation 4” is selected is 40/100 (= 40%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, it indicates that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game ends.

  In any case, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the above condition, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number and is shown in the non-special probability variable big stop stop symbol selection third table. The winning symbol is selectively determined by the selection ratio. Also, in the non-special probability variable big hit stop symbol selection third table, as shown in the fourth column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. In addition, the EVENT values “11H”, “12H”, and “13H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit this time is the above condition, and “4 round probability variation 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H11H” Will be.

  Note that the selected winning symbols are different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated), so the second special symbol The working memory of is difficult to break. And if you exclude the “4 round jackpot” from the winning type for the second special symbol, it will be difficult to draw the “4 round jackpot” especially in the “high probability state” and “time saving state”. There is an advantage that there is little inconvenience.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pretreatment]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In this embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery is a big hit (4 round normal big hit, 4 round probability big hit, 8 round normal big hit, 8 round positive big hit, 16 round normal big hit, 16 round positive big hit) For example, control is performed to generate a “reach effect” and make a big hit. In the “big hit winning variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined, and if a big hit is hit, one of the variation patterns is selected. Will be. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table when winning big hits]
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit winning variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when winning a big hit. In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pretreatment]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (hit-stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “4 round probability variation symbol”, “8 round probability variation symbol”, or “16 round probability variation symbol”. In any case, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). In addition, the main control CPU 72, if the winning symbol type determined in the previous step S2410 is "4 round normal symbol", "8 round normal symbol", or "16 round normal symbol" The value of the variable function operation flag is reset (low probability state setting means, low probability state transition means).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as the gaming state flag for all the winning symbols of the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. The flag area of the RAM 76 is set (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is only one type of “four times open small hit symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. Without being bound by the definition of “4 rounds (4 times open) or more”, it is possible to provide a “one time small hit symbol”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern determination means, variation time determination means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, a variation pattern equivalent to that at the time of variation is selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 15: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 16). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 16), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 15) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4450: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes limiter count setting processing. In this process, the limiter count is set based on the limiter count setting flag set during the previous big hit stop symbol determination process and the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state). Specifically, the upper limit number (limiter) of the number of times that can be continuously shifted to the “high probability state” is set, or the set limiter number is subtracted. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S4455: The main control CPU 72 generates a limiter remaining number command relating to the remaining number of limiters set as described above. The generated limiter remaining number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 16). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is any “15 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. In the case of “4-round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “4 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4635: The main control CPU 72 generates a short time remaining number command. The short time remaining number command is a value corresponding to the count cut counter value set in the time reduction state count area regarding the time reduction state. The generated short time remaining number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Limiter count setting processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of limiter count setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S4452: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the current special symbol is a high probability state. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored probability state flag, and confirms whether or not it is a value (01H) corresponding to a high probability state (probability variation state). . As a result of this confirmation, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the current special symbol is a high probability state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4460. On the other hand, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the current special symbol is not the high probability state (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4454.

  Step S4454: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the limiter count setting flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored limiter count setting flag, and determines whether the referenced one corresponds to ON (flag value is 01H). Check. If the result of this confirmation is that the limiter count setting flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4456. On the other hand, if the limiter count setting flag is not ON (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4458.

  Step S4456: The main control CPU 72 sets “7 times” as the limiter count (limiter remaining number). Here, the set value of the number of limiters (limiter remaining number) is stored in the limiter area of the RAM 76.

  Step S4458: The main control CPU 72 sets “3 times” as the number of limiters (the number of remaining limiters). Here, the set value of the number of limiters (limiter remaining number) is stored in the limiter area of the RAM 76.

  Step S4456: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the limiter count (remaining limiter count). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the limiter area of the RAM 76, refers to the stored limiter count (limiter remaining number), and subtracts 1 from the referenced value. Here, when the number of limiters after subtraction becomes “0”, this means that the limiter has been reached (remaining 0 times), and the gaming state after the big hit game to be executed is a low probability state and a time shortening state ( The specified number of times (for example, 100 times). Here, the value of the number of limiters subtracted (remaining limiter number) is stored again in the limiter area of the RAM 76.

  When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 30).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38a and the short time state display lamp 38b, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38a. Note that the probability variation state display lamp 38a is switched to non-display (turned off) even if the probability variation function operation flag is set when the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38b, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38c, 38d, and 38e in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the big hit type display lamps 38c, 38d, and 38e based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number command. At this time, one of the display lamps 38c, 38d, and 38e corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the continuous operation number command is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38e representing “16 rounds (16R)”. If the value of the continuous operation number command designates “8 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38d representing “8 rounds (8R)” and designates “4 rounds”. If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "4 rounds (4R)".

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 15). The interval time between rounds is set to about 2 seconds for “4 round symbols”, for example, and about several seconds (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds) for “8 round symbols” and “16 round symbols”. And In addition, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is 9 for all winning symbols, for example, but as mentioned above, winnings occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds). Is very rare (not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 16). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “8 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to eight, and if “4 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 Set the number of execution rounds to 4. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“3” for 4 times, “7” for 8 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first to fourth times. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” to “fourth open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, four times based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous special winning opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 34) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5310 because the release timer value is set for a short time in both the small hit release and the first to fourth round release of the “four-round probability variation symbol”. In most cases, it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has ended before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 34). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special prize closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (4, 8, or 16).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 34). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (four times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 16) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability variations. The probability variation number to be set is determined based on the winning symbol with reference to the gaming state operation number setting table. The specific contents of the game state operation frequency setting table will be further described later with reference to another drawing. The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 16) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: When the value of the time shortening function operation flag (variable time shortening function operation flag) is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time shortening. The probability variation number to be set is determined based on the winning symbol with reference to the gaming state operation number setting table. The specific contents of the game state operation frequency setting table will be further described later with reference to another drawing. The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5516: In any case, after the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 15) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game state operation frequency setting table]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state operation frequency setting table. This gaming state operation frequency setting table is referred to in each operation frequency setting process (step S5506 or S5510), and the setting frequency corresponding to the winning symbol is set in each process. In addition, the winning symbol is shown in the left column of the game state operation frequency setting table, the probability variation number of the special symbol to be set is shown in the second column from the left, and the third column from the left. Indicates the set time reduction count.

  For example, when the winning symbol is “4 round normal symbol 1 (4 round normal symbol 1)”, the probability variation number is not set (0 times) and the time reduction number is set to 25 times. When the winning symbol is “4 round normal symbol 2 (4 round normal symbol 2)”, the probability variation number is not set (0 times), and the time reduction number is set to 50 times. Therefore, when the limit is reached and the game state is a high probability state and a big hit is made during the non-time reduction state, the time reduction number is set to 25 or 50 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “8 Round Normal 1 (8 Round Normal Symbol 1)” or “8 Round Normal 2 (8 Round Normal Symbol 2)”, the probability variation count is not set (0 times), time The number of shortening is set to 100 times. Therefore, when the limit is reached and the game state is a high probability state and a big hit is made during the time shortening state, the time shortening number is set to 100 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “8 round normal 3 (8 round normal symbol 3)” or “8 round normal 4 (8 round normal symbol 4)”, the probability variation number is not set (0 times), time The number of shortening is set to 50 times or 100 times. Therefore, when the limit is reached and the gaming state is a high probability state and a big hit is made during the non-time shortening state, the time shortening number is set to 50 times or 100 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “16 round normal 1 (16 round normal symbol 1)” or “16 round normal 2 (16 round normal symbol 2)”, the probability variation number is not set (0 times), time The number of shortening is set to 100 times. Therefore, when the limit is reached and the big hit is made when the special high-speed digestion state is ON, the time reduction count is set to 100 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “4 round probability variation 1 (4 round probability variation symbol 1)” or “4 round probability variation 2 (4 round probability variation symbol 2)”, the probability variation count is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 25 or 50 times. Therefore, if no limit is set (0 times) and the gaming state is a big chance during the low probability state and the non-time shortening state, the state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time is shortened. This indicates that the number of times is set to 25 times or 50 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “4 round probability variation 3 (4 round probability variation symbol 3)” or “4 round probability variation 4 (4 round probability variation symbol 4)”, the probability variation number is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 25 or 50 times. Therefore, if the gaming state hits a large amount in the high probability state and the non-time shortened state before reaching the limit, the high probability state (probability variation state) is continued and the number of time reductions is 25. It is set to be set to 50 times or 50 times.

  For example, when the winning symbol is “8 round probability variation 1 (8 round probability variation symbol 1)”, the probability variation count is set to 10,000 times and the time reduction count is set to 50 times. Therefore, if no limit is set (0 times) and the gaming state is a big chance during the low probability state and the non-time shortening state, the state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time is shortened. This indicates that the number of times is set to 50 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “8 round probability variation 2 (8 round probability variation symbol 2)” or “8 round probability variation 3 (8 round probability variation symbol 3)”, the probability variation number is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 10,000 times. Therefore, if the gaming state is a high probability state and a big hit is made during the time shortening state before reaching the limit, the high probability state (probability variation state) is continued and the time shortening number is 10,000 times. It is set to.

  For example, when the winning symbol is “8 round probability variation 4 (8 round probability variation symbol 4)” or “8 round probability variation 5 (8 round probability variation symbol 5)”, the probability variation number is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 50 times or 10,000 times. Therefore, before the limit is set and reached, if the gaming state is a big hit in the high probability state and the non-time shortening state, the high probability state (probability variation state) is continued and the number of time reductions is 50. It represents that it is set to 10000 times or 10000 times.

  For example, if the winning symbol is “16 round probability variation 1 (16 round probability variation symbol 1)” or “16 round probability variation 2 (16 round probability variation symbol 2)”, the probability variation count is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 10,000 times. Therefore, if no limit is set (0 times) and the gaming state is a low probability state and a big hit is made in the time shortening state, the state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variation state) and the number of time shortening times Indicates that it is set to 10,000 times.

  For example, when the winning symbol is “16 round probability variation 3 (16 round probability variation symbol 3)” or “16 round probability variation 4 (16 round probability variation symbol 4)”, the probability variation number is set to 10,000 times, and the number of time reductions Is set to 10,000 times. Therefore, if the gaming state is a high probability state and a big hit is made during the time shortening state before reaching the limit, the high probability state (probability variation state) is continued and the time shortening number is 10,000 times. It is set to.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along each mode or each opportunity.

[F1: First normal mode]
When a game is started on the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] first normal mode. In the “first normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state” and “non-time shortened state”. [F1] Since the first normal mode is a non-time shortening state, basically, by generating a winning at the left start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game proceeds. For example, in order to teach the player that the current mode is the first normal mode, a background image (hereinafter referred to as a natural image) representing a landscape of “nature outdoors in the daytime” is displayed in the effect screen. Is done.

[F2: 4 rounds probable big hit, 8 rounds probable big hit (1st special symbol): Set to 7 limiters]
[F1] In the first normal mode, the first special symbol fluctuates by generating a winning at the left start winning opening 26, and when winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F2] 4 rounds probable big hit or 8 rounds probable change The jackpot will be selected. Specifically, any of the above-mentioned “4 round probability variation 1 (4 round probability variation symbol 1)”, “4 round probability variation 2 (4 round probability variation symbol 2)”, and “8 round probability variation 1 (8 round probability variation symbol 1)” Will be selected. When the jackpot game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F3] night mode.

[F3: Night mode]
[F3] In the night mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Here, the number of time reductions until the gaming state is shifted from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state is different according to the type of winning symbol in [F2] (for example, FIG. 38). Is set to 25 times or 50 times. For example, in order to teach the player that there is no current mode, a dedicated background image (for example, a night view) is displayed in the effect screen.

[F4: Time reduction count reaches 0]
[F3] In the night mode, when the special symbol variation display is executed for the set number of time reductions, [F5] the mode is shifted to the second normal mode (latent state).

[F5: second normal mode (latent state)]
[F4] When the number of time reductions reaches zero, the gaming state is shifted from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state. Therefore, in the “second normal mode (latent state)”, the winning probability of the special symbol is the “high probability state” and the “non-time reduction state”. Here, since the gaming state has returned to the non-time shortened state, a natural image in which the current mode is the same as the first normal mode is displayed in the liquid crystal screen.

[F6: Before reaching the limiter: 4 rounds probable big hit, 8 rounds probable big hit]
[F5] In the second normal mode (latent state), a special symbol fluctuates by generating a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 28a, and when winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F6] A 4-round probability variation jackpot or an 8-round probability variation jackpot will be selected. Specifically, “4 round probability variation 3 (4 round probability variation design 3)”, “4 round probability variation 4 (4 round probability variation design 4)”, “8 round probability variation 4 (8 round probability variation design 4)”, “ One of “8 round probability variation 5 (8 round probability variation symbol 5)” is selected. Then, when the big hit game corresponding to one of the winning symbols ends, the mode is shifted to [F3] night mode again. As the jackpot game is executed, the limiter count set in [F2] is decremented by 1.

[F7: Before reaching the limiter: 8 rounds probable big hit]
In a state before the limiter count (7 times) set in [F2] becomes 1, the [F3] special mode is obtained by generating a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 28a in the night mode. If the symbol fluctuates and the result of the internal lottery wins, [F7] 8-round probability variation jackpot is selected. Specifically, either “8 round probability variation 2 (8 round probability variation symbol 2)” or “8 round probability variation 3 (8 round probability variation symbol 3)” is selected. When the big hit game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F8] festival mode. As the jackpot game is executed, the limiter count set in [F2] is decremented by 1.

[F8: Festival mode]
[F8] In the festival mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Here, since the number of time reductions until the gaming state shifts from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state is set to 10000 times, the time reduction state will not end until the next big hit is won. This [F8] festival mode will not end until the next big hit is won. Therefore, [F7] 8 rounds probable big hit and [F8] festival mode are repeated until the limiter count becomes 1 (until the limiter is reached). For example, in order to teach the player that the current mode is the festival mode, a dedicated background image (for example, fan or lantern) is displayed in the effect screen.

[F9: When the limiter is reached: 8 rounds, regular big hit]
In the state where the number of limiters (7 times) set in [F2] is one, a winning is generated at the left start winning port 26a or the right start winning port 28a in the [F3] night mode or [F8] festival mode. As a result, the special symbol fluctuates, and when winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F9] 8-round normal jackpot is selected. Specifically, either “8 round normal 1 (8 round normal symbol 1)” or “8 round normal 2 (8 round normal symbol 2)” is selected. When the big hit game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F10] fireworks mode.

[F11: When the limiter is reached: 4 rounds of normal big hit, 8 rounds of big hit]
Also, unlike [F9], the left start winning opening 26 or the right start in the [F11] second normal mode (latent state) with the limiter count (7 times) set in [F2] being 1 time. By generating a winning at the winning opening 28a, the special symbol fluctuates, and when winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F11] 4 round normal big hit or 8 round normal big hit will be selected. Specifically, “4 Round Normal 1 (4 Round Normal Symbol 1)”, “4 Round Normal 2 (4 Round Normal Symbol 2)”, “8 Round Normal 3 (8 Round Normal Symbol 3)”, “ One of “8 round normal 4 (8 round normal symbol 4)” is selected. When the big hit game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F10] fireworks mode.

[F10: Fireworks mode]
[F10] In the fireworks mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state” and “time reduction state”. Here, the number of time reductions until the gaming state shifts from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state differs depending on the type of winning symbol in [F9] or [F11] (for example, FIG. 38). ), Specifically, 25 times, 50 times, or 100 times. For example, in order to teach the player that the current mode is the fireworks mode, a dedicated background image (for example, fireworks) is displayed in the effect screen.

[F15: Time reduction count reaches 0]
[F10] In the fireworks mode, when the special symbol variation display is executed for the set number of time reductions, [F1] the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

[F20: 16 rounds probable big hit: set to 3 limiters]
[F10] In the fireworks mode, a special symbol is changed by generating a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 28a. When winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F20] 16 rounds probable big hit is selected. Will be. Specifically, either “16 round probability variation 1 (16 round probability variation symbol 1)” or “16 round probability variation 2 (16 round probability variation symbol 2)” is selected. When the jackpot game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F21] heart zone.

[F21: Heart zone]
[F21] In the heart zone, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Since the number of time reductions until the gaming state is shifted from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state is set to 10000 times, the time reduction state will not end until the next big hit is won. The [F21] Heart Zone will not end until a big win is won. For example, to teach the player that the current mode is the heart zone, the light emitting unit 312 housed in the front of the liquid crystal screen slides from the right side to the center, and the light emitting unit 322 slides from the left side to the center. The light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined to form one heart shape on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen.

[F22: Before reaching the limiter: 16 rounds probable big hit]
In a state before the number of limiters (three times) set in [F20] reaches one, [F21] In the heart mode, a special prize is generated by generating a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 28a. If the symbol fluctuates and the winner is determined as a result of the internal lottery, [F21] 8-round probability variable jackpot is selected. Specifically, either “16 round probability variation 3 (16 round probability variation 3)” or “16 round probability variation 4 (16 round probability variation 4)” is selected. When the jackpot game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is continued to [F20] festival mode. As the big hit game is executed, 1 is subtracted from the limiter number set in [F20].

[F23: When reaching the limiter: 16 rounds, regular big hit]
[F20] When the number of limiters (three times) set in [F20] is 1, [F21] In the heart zone, a special symbol is changed by generating a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 28a. Then, when winning as a result of the internal lottery, [F23] 16 round normal jackpot will be selected. Specifically, either “16 round normal symbol 1 (16 round normal symbol 1)” or “16 round normal symbol 2 (16 round normal symbol 2)” is selected. When the big hit game corresponding to any winning symbol is completed, the mode is shifted to [F10] fireworks mode.

[F24: 16 rounds probable big hit (second special symbol): set to 3 limiters]
[F10] When the specified number of time reductions (25 times, 50 times, or 100 times) is completed in the fireworks mode, and [F1] the mode is transferred to the normal mode, the operation memory relating to the second special symbol Suppose that is left unconsumed. Then, when the remaining working memory relating to the second special symbol is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, [F24] 16 rounds probable big hit will be selected. Specifically, the above “16 round probability variation 2 (16 round probability variation 2)” is selected. When the big hit game ends, the mode is shifted to [F21] heart zone.

[Direction according to game flow]
In order to realize the above-described game flow, in the present embodiment, effects according to the game flow are executed. Hereinafter, a specific example of production will be described. ,

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Among these, for the left effect symbol, a symbol row is arranged in ascending order of “1” to “9”, and for the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol, the numbers are “9” to “1”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

In addition, as an example of the variable display effect using a specific effect design, two examples of the basic effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment and one example of the effect related to the limiter are listed. Will be described.
(1) Fluctuation display effect and stop display effect (at the time of deviation) (FIGS. 40 and 41)
(2) Fluctuation display effect, reach effect, and stop display effect (at the time of loss and big hit) (FIGS. 42 to 44)
(3) Effects related to the limiter (FIGS. 45 to 73)

[(1) Example of variable display effect and stop display effect (at the time of deviation)]
FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variation display and stop display of special symbols. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). In this variable display effect, after winning the left start winning opening 26, after the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and the stop display (including the fixed stop). Corresponds to a series of effects performed until the time. The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, the first special symbol represents non-winning by the first special symbol display device 34 (may be the second special symbol display device 35), which is lost (non-winning) in the previous internal lottery. In the case where the game is stopped and displayed, or when the game is started at the beginning of the business day in the pachinko machine 1 (so-called state in the morning after power-on). At this time, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a stop display effect (may be a result display effect) is performed in a manner representing the result of non-winning.

  The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Of these, the left effect symbol and right effect symbol are displayed in a relatively large size in the left and right areas of the display screen, respectively, while the medium effect symbol is displayed in a relatively small size in the middle area of the display screen. Has been.

  Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Note that the left, middle, and right effect symbols potentially constitute symbol sequences in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow in the vertical direction (scroll) in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen, but at the time of stop display, one effect symbol (Fig. In the example of 40, “3”-“4”-“7”) is displayed on the display screen.

  Although not shown in FIG. 40, a background image corresponding to the “outdoor stage” or “coast stage” is displayed on the display screen. The effect symbol is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but during the variable display (while scrolling), the entire effect symbol is displayed in a transparent (transparent) state, so that the visibility of the background image is improved. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the stay stage in the production.

[Operation memory display marker]
In the lower part of the display screen, an area for displaying a marker image indicating the presence of working memory is formed in a band shape. Since the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be accumulated up to 4 (upper limit number) during the game, wavy circles in the figure (reference symbols M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) In the band-like area at the bottom of the screen, four marker images are divided into left and right, and a maximum of eight can be displayed side by side. When an operation memory is generated during the game, a marker image indicating the presence is displayed in the band-like area. Among these, the maximum four marker images displayed on the left side correspond to the operation memory of the first special symbol, and the maximum four marker images displayed on the right side correspond to the operation memory of the second special symbol. It shall be. These marker images are displayed side by side in the order of storage from the center to the outside, for example, and the marker images corresponding to the newly added working memory are sequentially added and displayed on the outermost side.

[Fluctuating area]
Further, the changing area HA is formed at the center position of the band-like area at the lower part of the display screen. In the changing area HA, a marker image corresponding to the working memory consumed by the current change is displayed at a certain time. When the working memory is consumed due to the start of the next fluctuation, the marker image displayed next to the changing area HA (the head of each of the left and right columns) moves to the changing area HA, where there is a certain time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol is changed with priority over the first special symbol, when the marker images are displayed on both the left and right sides, the right marker image has priority and is changing. When the marker image is displayed on the left side only, the marker image closest to the center moves to the changing region HA. If any marker image remains on the left or right side of the belt-like region after the movement, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the center so that the marker image closest to the center is removed. In addition, when a marker image is displayed in the changing area HA and a predetermined time has elapsed, or when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing, the changing area HA is grayed out as illustrated. ing.

  In addition, fourth symbols Z1, Z2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are displayed at the upper right corner position of the display screen. These fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the three effect symbols of left, middle, and right, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the variation display of the effect symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply simple colors (for example, “□” figure) with a color, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “2 round big hit” or “15 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Memory number display effect]
In FIG. 40 (B): When a player borrows a game ball and starts a game by performing a launch operation, the game ball eventually wins at the left start winning port 26 (or the right start winning port 28a). A lottery opportunity occurs. In this example, since one winning memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated due to the winning at the left start winning opening 26, the marker is displayed in a manner indicating an increase of one working memory in the belt-like area at the bottom of the screen. M1 is newly displayed (memory number display effect executing means). Since the operation memory generated here is consumed as it is under the control of the main control CPU 72, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit on or immediately displayed after being lit on and displayed in a manner representing one stored number. Not lit. However, on presentation, the marker M1 is displayed within a short time, so that it is possible to clearly notify the player that “new operation memory has occurred”. Note that, when the first special symbol has started the variable display under the control of the main control CPU 72, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a mode of the variable display. Here, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the markers M1 and M2 correspond to the second special symbol, for example, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as a circle (o) in a blue display color. The marker M2 to be displayed is displayed as, for example, a red display color circle (◯). In addition, when an effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is performed, it may be displayed as a character image, or a display color may be blinked.

[Working memory consumption effect]
In FIG. 40 (C): With the consumption of the working memory, an effect of moving the marker M1 displayed on the left side of the band-like area at the lower part of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed (memory number display effect executing means). Thereby, it is possible to easily tell the player that the internal lottery has been performed by consuming one working memory for the player. Note that the marker M1 (without reference numerals) that has moved to the changing area HA is displayed in an enlarged manner, so that it is identified as so-called “hold”. At this time, the degree of expectation may be taught in advance by changing the mode of the marker M1 in the changing area HA.

[Variable display effects]
In addition, in synchronism with the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is performed by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect execution means). That is, the display of the left effect, the middle effect, and the right effect is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol. Is started. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. As already mentioned.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape of “nature outdoors in the daytime”. Such a background image is executed as the “stage effect” described above, and expresses that the stay stage on the effect is, for example, “normal mode” or “outdoor stage”. In the present embodiment, “normal mode” and “outdoor stage” correspond to a normal state in which the above-described variation time shortening function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition, various stages, zones, and modes are provided in the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for the various stages, zones, and modes (state display production execution means). The difference between these stages, zones and modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible. Further, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed, and the fourth symbol Z1 continues to express the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 41 (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped on the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

  In addition, since one new operation memory is added due to the occurrence of a winning at the left start winning opening 26 during the change, one new marker M1 is displayed on the left side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player of the increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) (memory number display effect executing means).

  In the changing area HA, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the marker M1, the changing marker M1 is not displayed and is changed to gray-out display. Accordingly, it is possible to more clearly convey to the player that the working memory has been consumed due to the change (memory number display effect execution means).

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 41 (E): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the production symbol representing the number “4” stops, the production sequence that represents the number “5” stops by sliding the design row for one symbol, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “6” stops, the design symbol representing the number “5” stops by sliding the symbol sequence in the reverse direction by one symbol, and thereby the pattern that develops to reach. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “1” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “5” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.
In addition, since one more operation memory is added during this period, a marker M1 (second) indicating the presence of the added operation memory is additionally displayed on the left side of the belt-like region.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 41 (F): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “2” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “5” − “2” − “6”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 41 (G): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the first special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Be started.

  That is, with the start of the next change, the left, middle, and right effect symbols all start changing display. Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. For example, there have been two working memories so far, but the oldest (oldest) one that was displayed closest to the center in the marker M1 is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory is consumed with respect to the first special symbol even in the production.

  In the example of (G) in FIG. 41, the operating memory is consumed by moving the marker M1 representing the operating memory that is at the head (most central) in the storage order to the changing area HA. It is expressed in the production that the remaining is one. In addition, the remaining one marker M1 displayed on the left side of the belt-like region is shifted toward the center one by one, and an effect of waiting until the next and subsequent changes is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. Yes (memory number display effect execution means).

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

  As described above, the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment has been described by taking (1) the change display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of deviation) as examples. Next, (2) a variable display effect, a reach effect, and a stop display effect (at the time of losing and a big hit) will be described as examples.

[(2) Examples of a variable display effect, a reach effect, and a stop display effect (at the time of losing and a big hit)
42 to 44 are continuous diagrams showing examples of a variable display effect, a reach effect, and a stop display effect with effect symbols.

[Variation display start]
In FIG. 42 (A): Synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is performed by the three symbol rows scrolling on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. That is, the display of the left effect, the middle effect, and the right effect is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol. Is started.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 42 (B): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 42 (C): After this, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
43 (D): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

[Notice after reach occurs]
FIG. 43 (E): In the display screen where the reach state has occurred, for example, a character image of “chance” is displayed at the center position for a while, and a radial flash image is displayed around the reach. A notice effect is performed. In addition, a mode in which “chance” sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 at this time may be used. By executing the notice effect after such a sensely lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Development of reach production]
In FIG. 43 (F): After that, the reaching design is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner position of the display screen, and for example, an image of a character imitating “lantern ghost” appears on the left side and the right side thereof. The effect that the image of “female character” appears and the image of the character “VS” appears at the center position is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the battle reach effect will be started. In the upper left corner position of the display screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“7” − “being changed” − “7”).

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 43 (G): In the display screen, for example, “Lantern Haunted” has an effect of opening a mouth and taking out the technique of “Kitsuke”. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 44 (H): In the display screen, the “female character” is now taking out a fan (weapon), and with the fan, there is an effect that accumulates enthusiasm while preparing to confront the “lantern ghost” .

  In FIG. 44 (I): And in the display screen, “Lantern Haunted” finally put out a special technique that makes a long tongue pop out from the mouth, and “Women Character” greets the special technique with a fan. In this state, if the “lantern ghost” wins, it will be out of place, and if the “female character” wins, it will be a big hit. Therefore, this situation is the final stage of battle reach production, and is the most exciting part as a game. For this reason, a cut-in notice or a helper appearance notice that another “female character” may help at the same time may be performed simultaneously in this scene. Alternatively, information that prompts the pressing operation of the effect switching button 45 (a character image such as “Please press the button!”) Is displayed on the display screen, and the color is changed when the effect switching button 45 is actually pressed. It is good also as performing the notice effect which represents the big hit reliability, such as a line cut-in notice.

[Result display effect (when disconnected)]
44 (J): In the display screen, “Land Lantern Ghost” is displayed together with the character image of “defeat ....”, and “Women Character” is displayed small. As a result, a result display effect representing that the current lottery result is out of place (non-winning) is performed. In the upper left corner position of the display screen, the result display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“7” − “8” − “7”).

  In FIG. 44 (K): On the display screen, the effect symbols are confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbols. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. In the example shown in the figure, it is shown that the production symbol is stopped by a combination of “7”-“8”-“7” in the numbers on the screen, and in this case, the current fluctuation is a normal “out”. Applicable things are expressed in the production. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is a flow when the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol corresponds to non-winning, but when it corresponds to winning, the performance is performed according to the following flow.

[Result display effect (at the time of hit)]
In FIG. 44 (L): In the display screen, “female character” is displayed together with the letters “Victory!” And “lantern ghost” is displayed small, which means a big win (winning). A result display effect is performed. In addition, at the upper left corner position of the display screen, the result display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("7"-"7"-"7").

  In FIG. 44 (M): On the display screen, the effect symbols are confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbols. As in the case of the loss, the effect symbol fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z1 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “15 rounds probable big hit”.

  As described above, the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment has been described by taking (2) the change display effect, the reach effect, and the stop display effect (at the time of loss and big hit) as examples. As described above, by performing the variable display effect and the reach effect (battle reach effect), the player can have a great sense of expectation for the big hit. Next, (3) examples of effects related to the limiter will be described.

[(3) Example of production 1 related to limiter]
45 to 72 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects related to the limiter. When the number of limiters is not set (when the number of limiters is 0), if the first big hit is won, the limiter is set and the right to play the big hit game for the specified number of times is generated. As described above, when the first big hit is in the non-time shortening state, the limiter is set to seven times, and the right to execute eight big hit games is generated. The example of the production 1 related to the limiter assumes a specific example of the production after winning the big hit as a result of the internal lottery of the first special symbol, the limiter is set to 7 times, and the big hit game is started. Yes. Therefore, “8 rounds probable big hit” is won, and after the above reach production, the production symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of three of “7”-“7”-“7”, and the big hit game is executed. This will be described from the stage when the big-game production starts.

[The first jackpot game]
[Opening production 1]
In FIG. 45, (A): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “8 round big hit” is displayed. Although not shown, in the case of “4 round big hit”, character information such as “REGULAR BOUNUS” is displayed as an opening effect correspondingly. Therefore, since the big hit this time is a big bonus (BIG BOUNUS), it can be notified to the player that a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a regular bonus (REGULAR BOUNUS).

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, a heart-shaped image B1 is displayed beside character information such as “BIG BOUNUS”, and one heart-shaped image B2 smaller than the image B1 is displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that an effect related to the big hit effect is being executed.

[Opening production 2]
[Right-handed suggestion]
(B) in FIG. 45: After that, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please right-hand!”. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the position at which the game ball is fired during the game so far has been changed from left-handed to right-handed.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
(C) in FIG. 45: After that, when the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role production with the contents corresponding to the progress status of the big hit game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on the small heart-shaped image B2 that has been displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game is being executed using the right for one time among the rights that can be played for the jackpot game for eight times.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 46 (D): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final eight rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and “in use” is continuously displayed on the small heart-shaped image B2 at the lower left position of the screen. Is displayed.

[Ending production 1]
[Night mode entry production]
In FIG. 46, (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), an ending effect (a main character end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “night mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “night mode” (high probability state and time reduction state (50 times)) as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Stage change production]
In addition, the background changes to a background image with a motif of an image of a building town at night. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the normal mode (background: park image) to the night mode.

[Ending production 2]
[Time reduction times display effect]
(F) in FIG. 46: After that, an effect that the female character emits a dialogue such as “50 matches” is executed. Thus, the player can be informed that the number of time reductions is 50, and that it is advantageous to win a big hit within 50 times.

[Ending production 3]
[Right-handed suggestion]
In FIG. 47 (G): After that, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please make a right-hand strike!”. Thereby, following the jackpot game, it is possible to teach the player that the position at which the game ball is fired remains the right-handed specification.

[Time reduction times display effect]
In FIG. 47 (H): When the ending effect of the big hit game is finished, a state where the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the big hit (“7”-“7”-“7”) of the previous result is stopped is displayed. . Then, character information such as “saw 50 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. Thereby, when the special symbol variation display is executed 50 times, the player can be informed that the time shortening state ends and the state shifts to the non-time shortening state. In addition, character information such as “night mode” is always displayed at the top of the screen (except for the reach effect).

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 47 (I): Thereafter, the starting condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the first special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Be started.

[Time reduction times display effect]
Also, character information such as “saw 49 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. As a result, the special symbol variation display is executed once, and when the special symbol variation display is executed 49 times, the time shortening state is terminated and the player is instructed to shift to the non-time shortening state. Can do.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 48 (J): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped on the screen.

[Operating memory increase effect]
In addition, when a right-handed winning opening 28a is generated during the change in the right-handed state, one new operation memory is added, so a new marker is displayed on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. One M2 is displayed. Thereby, an increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) can be easily taught to the player.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 48 (K): Thereafter, when a certain amount of time (about 2/3 of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the right effect design stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped on the screen.

[Operating memory increase effect]
In addition, when a right-handed winning opening 28a is generated during the change in the right-handed state, one new operation memory is added, so a new marker is displayed on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. One M2 is displayed and a total of two markers M2 are displayed. Thereby, an increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) can be easily taught to the player.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 48 (K): After that: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “2” is stopped on the screen, and in this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “1”-“2”-“5”. For this reason, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out of phase”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Operating memory increase effect]
In addition, when a right-handed winning opening 28a is generated during the change in the right-handed state, one new operation memory is added, so a new marker is displayed on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. One M2 is displayed and a total of three markers M2 are displayed. Thereby, an increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) can be easily taught to the player. As described above, during the time shortening state, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened. However, since the addition of the operation memory is frequently executed even in the short time, the right start winning award 28a. This means that frequent winnings are generated, and during the time-reduced state, it is difficult for the special symbol variation display to be interrupted.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 49 (M): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (total of 3) corresponding to the second special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Time reduction times display effect]
In addition, character information such as “saw 48 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. As a result, the special symbol variation display is executed twice, and when the special symbol variation display is executed 48 times, the time shortening state is terminated and the player is instructed to shift to the non-time shortening state. Can do.

[One time saving time residue]
(N) in FIG. 49: After that, it is assumed that the special symbol variation display is smoothly executed without winning the big hit in the time shortening state, and the time shortening count becomes one time. That is, it is assumed that when the variation display of the next special symbol is completed, the gaming state shifts from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state. In the illustrated example, the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol representing the numbers “2” and “3” are stopped on the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 49 (O): After that: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “2” is stopped on the screen, and in this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “2” − “2” − “3”. For this reason, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out of phase”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 50 (P): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Last time reduction state production]
Also, text information such as “Last” is displayed in a form overlapping the scroll display effect by the effect symbol. Thereby, the player can be informed that the time shortening state ends with the change and the game state is changed to the non-time shortening state from the next change. In addition, character information such as “scoring 0 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 49 (O): Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is “3”-“1”-“5”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 50 (R): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stage change production]
In addition, the background changes to a natural image as the time reduction state ends. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the night mode to the normal mode. Also, character information such as “night mode” at the top of the screen is not displayed. In addition, since this normal mode is a high probability state, it corresponds to the second normal mode (latent state), but from the mode (background image) on the screen, it is a low probability whether it is a high probability state (second normal mode). The specification is such that the player does not know the state (first normal mode).

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, in accordance with the transition to the non-time shortening state, a left-handed suggestion effect in which character information such as “Please return to left-handed” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the position at which the game ball has been shot during the game so far has been changed from right-handed to left-handed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 51 (S): Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is “4”-“2”-“8”, it is expressed on the effect that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “out”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, the effect that character information such as “please return to the left” is displayed at the top of the screen continues to be executed.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 51 (T): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (total of 3) corresponding to the second special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, the left-handed suggestion effect in which character information such as “please return to left-handed” is displayed at the top of the screen continues to be executed. It should be noted that the left-handed suggestion effect is ended when a predetermined event occurs, such as when a predetermined time has passed, the left start winning opening 26 is won, or a game ball passes through the start gate 20.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 51 (U): After that, the special symbol variation display is smoothly executed without winning the jackpot in the non-time shortened state, and when the first special symbol stop display time elapses, the first special symbol or the first special symbol is displayed. It will be in the state where the starting conditions of 2 special symbols were satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of four) corresponding to the first special symbol in this state, one of the oldest working memories is consumed and the next variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Be started. In addition, the case where the big hit (8 rounds probability variation 4) is won as a result of the internal lottery of the first special symbol is assumed.

[Reach condition occurs]
In FIG. 52 (V): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect. Thereafter, the reach effect (FIGS. 43 and 44) described above is executed.

[Confirmed stop display effect]
In FIG. 52 (W): In the display screen, the effect symbols are confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbols. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z1 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “8 round probability variation 4”.

[The second big hit game]
[Opening production 1]
In FIG. 52 (X): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “8 round big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, a heart-shaped image B1 is displayed beside character information such as “BIG BOUNUS”, and one heart-shaped image B2 smaller than the image B1 is displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that a big hit game using one right is to be executed.

  53 (Y) to (f): When the big hit is won in the normal mode (non-time shortened state), and the big hit game corresponding to the 8-round probability variation 4 of the winning symbol is started, ) To FIG. 47 (I) is performed. More specifically, the big-game effect corresponding to the 8-round big hit is executed, and the ending effect that teaches the number of time reductions (for example, 50 times) set corresponding to the 8-round probability variation 4 of the winning symbol is executed. . When the big hit effect ends, the mode is shifted to the night mode, and when the condition for starting the next change is satisfied, the effect symbol change display is executed in conjunction with the special symbol change display.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 54 (g): After that, when the time change display of the special symbol is executed smoothly without winning the jackpot and the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the first special symbol or the second symbol is displayed. The special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of 4) corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a state in which the number of time reductions is left 17 times), one of the oldest working memories is consumed. The next variable display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the case where the big hit (8 rounds probability variation 3) is won as a result of the internal lottery of the second special symbol is assumed.

[Reach condition occurs]
54 (h): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and an effect of generating a reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect. Thereafter, the reach effect (FIGS. 43 and 44) described above is executed.

[Confirmed stop display effect]
(I) in FIG. 54: On the display screen, the effect symbol is confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the second special symbol. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “8-round probability variation 3”.

[The third big hit game]
[Opening production 1]
In FIG. 55, (j): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “8 round big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, a heart-shaped image B1 with “× 6” written next to the character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” is displayed, and six heart-shaped images B2 smaller than the image B1 are displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Is done. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining 6 jackpot games.

[Opening production 2]
[Right-handed suggestion]
(K) in FIG. 55: Thereafter, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Right-handed as it is!”. Thereby, it is possible to instruct the player that the position where the game ball is fired remains right-handed during the night mode.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 55 (l): After that, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big role effect with the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image among the six small heart-shaped images B2 that have been displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game is being executed using the right for one time out of the rights that can be used for the remaining six jackpot games.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 56 (m): After that, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when the final eight rounds are entered, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the six small heart-shaped images B2 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[Ending production 1]
[Festival mode entry production]
In FIG. 56, (n): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during end processing), an ending effect (a main character end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Festival mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “festival mode” (high probability state and time reduction state (10,000 times)) as a privilege after the big hit game.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In the lower left position of the screen, one of the six heart-shaped images B2 smaller than the image B1 is turned off and displayed in a total of five. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining five jackpot games.

[Stage change production]
Also, the background changes to a background image with a festive image as a motif. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the night mode (background: night view image) to the festival mode.

[Ending production 2]
[Right-handed suggestion]
56 (o): Thereafter, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please right-hand!”. Thereby, following the jackpot game, it is possible to teach the player that the position at which the game ball is fired remains the right-handed specification.

  In FIG. 57, (p): When the ending effect of the big hit game is finished, the state in which the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the big hit ("7"-"7"-"7") is stopped and displayed is displayed. . In addition, character information such as “festival mode” is always displayed at the top of the screen (except for the reach effect).

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 57 (q): After that, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 57 (r): After that, it is assumed that the special symbol change display is executed smoothly without winning the jackpot in the festive mode (high probability state + time reduction state), and after a while, the jackpot is won. . In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “8-round probability variation 3”.

[The fourth big hit game]
[Opening production]
58 (s): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “8 round big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, a heart-shaped image B1 with “× 5” written next to the character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” is displayed, and five heart-shaped images B2 smaller than the image B1 are displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Is done. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining five jackpot games.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 58 (t): Thereafter, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect having the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image among the five small heart-shaped images B2 displayed so far. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game is being executed using the right for one time out of the rights that can be used for the remaining five jackpot games.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 58 (u): After this, when the big hit game has proceeded smoothly and the game has shifted to the final eight rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the five small heart-shaped images B2 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[Ending production]
[Festival mode entry production]
In FIG. 59, (v): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), an ending effect (a big role end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, text information “Continue festival mode” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, it is possible to teach the player that the “festival mode” (high probability state and time reduction state (10000 times)) continues as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In the lower left position of the screen, one of the five heart-shaped images B2 smaller than the image B1 is turned off and displayed in a total of four. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining four jackpot games.

  In FIG. 59, (w): When the ending effect of the big hit game is finished, a state where the combination (“7”-“7”-“7”) of the effect symbol at the time of the big hit of the previous result is stopped and displayed. . In addition, character information such as “festival mode” is always displayed at the top of the screen (except for the reach effect).

[Next fluctuation start]
(X) in FIG. 59: After that, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 60 (y): After that, the special symbol change display is smoothly executed in the festive mode (high probability state + time reduction state), and during that time, the jackpot is won three times, and after a while, the jackpot (“8 It is assumed that the round 2 ”) is won. Therefore, it is assumed that a jackpot is won in a state where there is a right to play the remaining one jackpot game. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to “8 round normal 2”.

[The 8th big hit game]
[Opening production]
In FIG. 60 (z): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “8 round big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, a heart-shaped image B1 in which “× 1” is written beside the character information such as “BIG BOUNUS” is displayed, and one heart-shaped image B2 smaller than the image B1 is displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Is done. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that a big hit game using the remaining one right will be executed.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 60 (ii): After that, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big role effect having the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on one small heart-shaped image B2 that has been displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game is executed using the right for one time.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 61 (ro): After this, when the big hit game has progressed smoothly and the final eight rounds are entered, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is in progress. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and “1” is continuously displayed on one small heart-shaped image B2 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed.

[Ending production 1]
[Fireworks mode entry production]
In FIG. 61 (ha): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), an ending effect (big end effect) that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “firework mode” (low probability state and time reduction state (100 times)) as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Stage change production]
Also, the background changes to a background image with a firework image as a motif. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the festival mode (background: festival image) to the fireworks mode.

[Ending production 2]
[Time reduction times display effect]
In FIG. 61 (ni): After that, an effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “100 times of big game” is executed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of time reductions is 100 times, and that it is advantageous to win a big hit within 100 times.

[Ending production 3]
[Right-handed suggestion]
62 (e): After that, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please right-hand!”. Thereby, following the jackpot game, it is possible to teach the player that the position at which the game ball is fired remains the right-handed specification.

[Time reduction times display effect]
In FIG. 62 (F): When the ending effect of the big hit game is finished, a state in which the combination (“7”-“7”-“7”) of the effect symbol at the time of the big hit of the previous result is stopped is displayed. . In the lower left corner position of the screen, character information such as “saw 100 times” is displayed. Thus, the player can be informed that when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times, the time shortening state ends and the state shifts to the non-time shortening state. In addition, character information such as “fireworks mode” is always displayed at the top of the screen (except for the reach effect).

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 62 (and): Thereafter, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Time reduction times display effect]
Also, character information such as “saw 99 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. This tells the player that the special symbol variation display has been executed once, so that if the special symbol variation display is executed 99 times, the time reduction state will end and the state will shift to a non-time reduction state. Can do.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 63: After that, the special symbol change display is smoothly executed without winning the big win in the time shortened state, and when the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. The special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of 4) corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a state in which the number of time reductions is left 17 times), one of the oldest working memories is consumed. The next variable display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the case where the big hit (16 round probability variation 2) is won as a result of the internal lottery of the second special symbol is assumed.

  Here, if the number of limiters is not set (the number of limiters is 0) and the first jackpot is won, the limiter will be set and the right to play the jackpot game for the specified number of times will be generated To do. As described above, when the first big hit is in the time shortening state, the limiter is set to three times, and the right to execute four big hit games is generated. In addition, what hitherto had been “8 round big hit” becomes “16 round big hit”.

[Reach condition occurs]
In FIG. 63 (Ri): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect. Thereafter, the reach effect (FIGS. 43 and 44) described above is executed.

[Confirmed stop display effect]
In FIG. 63 (Nu): Then, in the display screen, the effect symbol is confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the second special symbol. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color) corresponding to “16 round probability variation 2”.

[The first jackpot game]
[Opening production 1]
In FIG. 64 (ru): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, the character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, the character information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “16 rounds big hit” is displayed. For this reason, since the big hit this time is a super big bonus (SUPER BIG BOUNUS), it can be notified to the player that more prize balls can be obtained than at the time of the big bonus (BIG BOUNUS).

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
Next to the text information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS”, the text information “× 4” is written in the heart-shaped image B3 in which two heart-shaped images B1 displayed at the time of “8 round big hit” are superimposed. Displayed. Also, four heart-shaped images B4 smaller than the image B3 are displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining four jackpot games.

[Opening production 2]
[Right-handed suggestion]
In FIG. 64 (O): After that, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please make a right-hand strike!”. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the position where the game ball is fired remains right-handed during the fireworks mode.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 64 (wa): Thereafter, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect having the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image among the four small heart-shaped images B4 that have been displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game is being executed using the right for one time among the rights that can be used for the remaining four jackpot games.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 65 (ka): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the middle eight rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (the number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the four small heart-shaped images B4 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[Big hit game continuation production]
65: (8): In the eighth round, the light emitting unit 312 housed in the front of the liquid crystal screen slides from the right side to the center, the light emitting unit 322 slides from the left side to the center, and the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 When combined, one heart shape is formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen. Then, character information such as “continue” is displayed inside the formed heart shape. As a result, the player is informed that the current big hit is not “8 round big hit” but “16 round big hit” and that the player can obtain more prize balls than “8 round big hit”. be able to.

[9th round]
In FIG. 65 (ta): After that, the big hit game progresses smoothly, and when the next nine rounds are entered, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND9” is displayed on the screen, and during the big hit game A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (the number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the four small heart-shaped images B4 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[16th round]
In FIG. 66 (re): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (the number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the four small heart-shaped images B4 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[Ending production 1]
[Heart zone entry production]
In FIG. 66 (so): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), an ending effect (big end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Enter Heart Zone” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “heart zone” (high probability state and time reduction state (10000 times)) as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Stage change production]
In addition, the light emitting unit 312 housed in the front of the liquid crystal screen slides from the right side to the center, the light emitting unit 322 slides from the left side to the center, and the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined to form one heart shape. Formed on the front of the LCD screen. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has shifted to the heart zone.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
In addition, three heart-shaped images B4 smaller than the image B3 are displayed at the lower center position of the screen. Thus, the player can be informed that he / she has the right to execute the remaining three jackpot games.

[Ending production 2]
[Right-handed suggestion]
In FIG. 66 (tsu): After that, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as “Please right-hand!”. Thereby, following the jackpot game, it is possible to teach the player that the position at which the game ball is fired remains the right-handed specification.

[Time reduction times display effect]
In FIG. 67 (Ne): When the ending effect of the big hit game is finished, the state where the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the big hit (“7”-“7”-“7”) of the previous result is stopped is displayed. . In addition, the light-emitting unit 312 and the light-emitting unit 322 are combined on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen, and a variable display effect using the effect design is executed while one heart shape is formed.

[Memory number display effect]
In addition, the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined to the left of one heart shape, and the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is, for example, a blue display color circle (◯) at the lower left position of the screen. The marker M2 displayed as a graphic and corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as, for example, a red display color circle (◯). In this case, there are two working memories corresponding to the first special symbol and four working memories corresponding to the second special symbol.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 67 (NA): After that, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 67 (R): After that, the special symbol change display is executed smoothly without winning the big win in the heart zone (high probability state + time reduction state), and after a while, the big win ("16 rounds probable change 4") Assume that you have won. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, pink display color) corresponding to “16 round probability variation 4”.

[The second big hit game]
[Opening production]
In FIG. 68 (mu): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, the character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, the character information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “16 rounds big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
Also, a heart-shaped image B3 with “× 3” written next to the character information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS” is displayed, and three heart-shaped images B4 smaller than the image B3 are displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Is displayed. Thus, the player can be informed that he / she has the right to execute the remaining three jackpot games.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 68 (U): Thereafter, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect having the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image among the three small heart-shaped images B4 that have been displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game is being executed using the right for one time out of the rights for the remaining three jackpot games.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 68 (ゐ): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly, and when the final 16 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (the number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and among the three small heart-shaped images B4 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed on the leftmost heart-shaped image.

[Ending production]
[Heart zone entry production]
69 (No): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), an ending effect (a main character end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Heart Zone Continuation” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed that the “heart zone” (high probability state and time reduction state (10,000 times)) continues as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  Also, during the big hit game, the light emitting unit 312 housed in the front of the liquid crystal screen slides from the right side to the center, the light emitting unit 322 slides from the left side to the center, and the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined to form one heart. The shape of the shape is formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen. As a result, the player can be informed that the heart zone will continue.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
Also, two heart-shaped images B4 smaller than the image B3 are displayed at the lower center position of the screen. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that he / she has the right to execute the remaining two jackpot games.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 69 (O): Thereafter, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 69, the special symbol change display is executed smoothly in the heart zone (high probability state + time shortening state), and the winner is won once in the meantime. It is assumed that the round 2 ”) is won. Therefore, it is assumed that a jackpot is won in a state where there is a right to play the remaining one jackpot game. In this case, for the combination of effect symbols, a fixed stop display such as “7”-“7”-“7” is performed. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z2 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, gray display color) corresponding to “16 round normal 2”.

[The fourth big hit game]
[Opening production]
In FIG. 70 (or): When the big hit game is started, first, an opening effect (big start effect) is executed. Specifically, the character information to be displayed on the screen is set based on the winning symbol at the time of winning, and in this case, the character information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS” corresponding to “16 rounds big hit” is displayed.

In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “7”) is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”.

[Big hit game execution right display effect]
Also, a heart-shaped image B4 with “× 1” written next to the character information such as “SUPER BIG BOUNUS” is displayed, and one heart-shaped image B3 smaller than the image B4 is displayed at the lower left position of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that a big hit game using the remaining one right will be executed.

[Director during big role]
[Round 1]
In FIG. 70 (ma): Thereafter, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect having the contents corresponding to the progress status of the jackpot game is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed.

[Direction during use]
In the lower left position of the screen, character information such as “in use” is displayed on one small heart-shaped image B4 that has been displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game is executed using the right for one time.

[16th round]
In FIG. 70 (K): After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when the final 16 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number “7”) as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen, and “1” is continuously displayed on one small heart-shaped image B4 at the lower left position of the screen. Character information such as “in use” is displayed.

[Ending production 1]
[Fireworks mode entry production]
In FIG. 71, (F): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), an ending effect (a main character end effect) with a content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an ending effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “firework mode” (low probability state and time reduction state (100 times)) as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Stage change production]
Also, the background changes to a background image with a firework image as a motif. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the heart zone to the fireworks mode.

[Ending production 2]
[Time reduction times display effect]
In FIG. 71 (ko): After that, an effect in which a female character utters a line such as “100 times of big game” is executed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of time reductions is 100 times, and that it is advantageous to win a big hit within 100 times.

[Next fluctuation start]
71 (e): After that, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Time reduction times display effect]
Also, character information such as “saw 99 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. This tells the player that the special symbol variation display has been executed once, so that if the special symbol variation display is executed 99 times, the time reduction state will end and the state will shift to a non-time reduction state. Can do.

[Stop display effect]
In Fig. 72 (Te): After that, the special symbol change display is executed smoothly without winning the big win in the fireworks mode (low probability state + time shortened state), and the second special with one time shortening remaining. Assume that the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the symbol stop display. In this case, since the combination of effect symbols is “5”-“2”-“6”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”. In addition, in the production to the state in (t) in FIG. 72, the change display of the special symbol is smooth from the state in (to) in FIG. 62 without winning the big hit in the fireworks mode (low probability state + time shortening state). It can also be applied to cases where it is executed.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 72 (A): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Last time reduction state production]
Also, text information such as “Last” is displayed in a form overlapping the scroll display effect by the effect symbol. Thereby, the player can be informed that the time shortening state ends with the change and the game state is changed to the non-time shortening state from the next change. In addition, character information such as “scoring 0 times” is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 72 (sa): Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is “6”-“3”-“4”, it is expressed in the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 73 (ki): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Stage change production]
In addition, the background changes to a natural image as the time reduction state ends. Thereby, the player can be informed that the mode has been changed from the fireworks mode to the normal mode. Also, character information such as “fireworks mode” at the top of the screen is not displayed. In addition, since this normal mode is a low probability state, it corresponds to the first normal mode, but on the screen, from the mode (background image), it is a high probability state (second normal mode) or a low probability state (first It is a specification that the player does not know whether the normal mode).

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, in accordance with the transition to the non-time shortening state, a left-handed suggestion effect in which character information such as “Please return to left-handed” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the position at which the game ball has been shot during the game so far has been changed from right-handed to left-handed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 73 (yu): Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is “4”-“2”-“8”, it is expressed on the effect that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “out”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, the effect that character information such as “please return to the left” is displayed at the top of the screen continues to be executed.

[Next fluctuation start]
FIG. 73 (me): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (total of 3) corresponding to the second special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started.

[Left-handed suggestion]
In addition, the left-handed suggestion effect in which character information such as “please return to left-handed” is displayed at the top of the screen continues to be executed. It should be noted that the left-handed suggestion effect is ended when a predetermined event occurs, such as when a predetermined time has passed, the left start winning opening 26 is won, or a game ball passes through the start gate 20.

  As mentioned above, the example of the production | presentation regarding the limiter in this embodiment was demonstrated. As explained above, if the first jackpot is won when the limiter is not set, the number of limiters (the number of jackpot rights (shifted to the high probability state) depends on whether the gaming state is a time shortening state or a non-time shortening state. The number of rounds during a big hit game is also different. Further, the number of time reductions to be set differs depending on whether the gaming state is a time reduction state or a non-time reduction state. In order to teach the player about these differences, effects using various modes (stages) are performed.

  Next, the number of award balls that can be obtained during the above jackpot effect will be described using the following two cases in which the game state per hit for which the limiter is set is different. The first is a gaming state in which the lottery probability state of the internal lottery concerning the special symbol is a low probability state and a non-time shortening state, that is, when the effect in the first normal mode is being executed. It is. The second is that the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is similarly a low-probability state and a gaming state that is a time-shortening state, that is, when the effect by the fireworks mode is being executed. is there. In addition, when the gaming machine is activated, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a low probability state and a gaming state that is a non-time shortened state (when the power is turned off in the probability variation state) The first jackpot after startup is when the first effect in the first normal mode is being executed. In addition, after the game state has transitioned from the second time reduction state to the first non-time reduction state, if you win the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, you will win the big hit in the second time reduction state (Refer to F24 in FIG. 39). This is because the operation memory (for example, up to 4 operation memories) related to the second special symbol is stored during the time reduction state before the transition to the non-time reduction state, and when the transition to the non-time reduction state is made. Corresponds to the case where the working memory is digested and the result of internal lottery corresponds to winning.

[Number of prize balls that can be earned from limiter setting to reaching the limiter]
FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are diagrams illustrating the number of winning balls that can be obtained during a big hit game from the special symbol low probability state (when the limiter is set) to when the limiter is reached.

[Special figure low probability, first hit during non-short-time state]
First, in FIG. 74, when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery relating to the special symbol is a low probability state and the game state is a non-time shortening state, a big hit is won and the big hit from the limiter is set to the limiter reaching It is a figure explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired during a game. (A) in FIG. 74 shows a gaming state at the time of winning. (B) in FIG. 74 shows the variation of the winning symbol until reaching the limiter. (C) in FIG. 74 shows the relationship between the number of jackpots and the remaining number of limiters (remaining limiter number). In FIG. 74, (D) indicates the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game from the first big hit when the limiter is set until the limiter is reached (only the prize balls at the big prize opening (the prizes at the general prize opening and the starting prize opening). Sphere is not included).

[First big hit (first hit): Limiter setting (7)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a low probability state and the gaming state is in the non-time shortened state (first normal mode) If you win the jackpot (first win) in the middle) and the winning symbol for the first hit falls under “8 Round Probability 1”, the right for eight hits will be generated. Furthermore, the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state and a time reduction state, that is, to the night mode, in the internal lottery related to the special symbol. Here, the number of times of setting the high probability state is 10,000, whereas the number of time reductions is set to 50. Therefore, when the special symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game is finished, the time shortening state is ended, and the gaming state is shifted to the non-time shortening state from the next variation, that is, the second normal mode (latent state). ). In the next second big hit, the time reduction state (50 times) is completed, and a big hit in the non-time reduction state is assumed.

  Further, as shown in (C) of FIG. 74, since the first big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is set to seven. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 74, when the big hit game is executed based on the “8 round probability variation 1” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed eight times, The number of award balls that can be won during this big hit game is 8 rounds.

[The second big hit: Limiter subtraction (6)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, a game in which the lottery probability state of the internal lottery relating to the special symbol is a high probability state and is in a non-time shortened state before reaching the limiter If a big win is won during the state (during the second normal mode (latent state)), “8 round probability variation 4” is selected as the winning symbol. Furthermore, the game state continues with the lottery probability state of the internal lottery relating to the special symbol in a high probability state (reset to 10,000 times), and shifts to the time shortening state, that is, shifts to the night mode. Here, the number of time reductions is set to 50 again. Therefore, when the special symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game ends, the time shortening state is ended, and the gaming state is shifted to the non-time shortening state from the next variation. The next third big hit is assumed to be a big hit in a time-reduced state (50 times).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 74C, since the second big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is subtracted to 6 and set. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 74, when the big hit game is executed based on the “8 round probability variation 4” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed eight times. The number of prize balls that can be won during the big hit game is 8 rounds, indicating that a total of 16 rounds of prize balls have been obtained since the limiter was set.

[The third big hit: Limiter subtraction (5)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, the gaming state before reaching the limiter, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and is in a time shortening state When winning a big hit in the middle (in the night mode), “8 round probability variation 3” is selected as the winning symbol. Further, the gaming state is continued while the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is kept in the high probability state, and is shifted to the time shortening state, that is, the festival mode. Here, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000. Therefore, the time reduction state continues until the next big hit (because the number of time reductions never reaches zero).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 74C, since the third big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is subtracted to be set to five. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 74, when the big hit game is executed based on the “8 round probability variation 3” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed eight times. The number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is 8 rounds, indicating that a total of 24 rounds of prize balls have been obtained since the limiter was set.

[The fourth big hit: Limiter subtraction (4)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, the gaming state before reaching the limiter, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and is in a time shortening state If you win a big hit in the middle (in the festival mode), “8-round probability variation 3” is selected as the winning symbol. Furthermore, the game state is continued with the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol being the high probability state, and the time shortening state is also continued. That is, the probability variation number and the time reduction number are reset to 10,000. Accordingly, the time reduction state continues until the next big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), since the fourth big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is subtracted to 4 and set. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 74, when the big hit game is executed based on the “8 round probability variation 3” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed eight times. The number of award balls that can be acquired during this big hit game is 8 rounds, indicating that a total of 32 rounds of prize balls have been acquired since the limiter was set.

[Fifth to seventh big hit: Limiter subtraction (3 → 2 → 1)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, in common with the fifth to seventh jackpots, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state before reaching the limiter. In addition, when a big win is won during the gaming state (festival mode) in which the time is shortened, “8 round probability variation 3” is selected as the winning symbol. Furthermore, the game state is continued with the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol being the high probability state, and the time shortening state is also continued. That is, the probability variation number and the time reduction number are reset to 10,000. Therefore, the time shortening state continues until the next (sixth to eighth) big hits corresponding to the fifth to seventh big hits.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 74C, since the fifth to seventh jackpot games are executed, the remaining limiter times are set to be subtracted from 3, 2, and 1, respectively. As shown in FIG. 74 (D), when a big hit game is executed for each big win based on “8 round probability variation 3” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is repeated eight times. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be won during this jackpot game will be 8 rounds, indicating that a total of 40, 48, and 56 rounds of prize balls have been won after the end of each jackpot. Yes.

[Eighth big hit: Limiter subtraction (0): When the limiter is reached]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 74, when the limiter is reached, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and the gaming state is in a time reduction state When winning a big hit in the middle (in the festival mode), “8 rounds normal 2” is selected as the winning symbol. Further, in the gaming state, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, but the time reduction state is continued, that is, the game mode is shifted to the fireworks mode. The number of time reductions is set to 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished, the time shortening state is terminated, and the gaming state is shifted to the non-time shortening state from the next variation, that is, the first normal mode is shifted. The

  Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), since the last 8th big hit game granted at the time of setting the limiter is executed, the remaining number of limiters is subtracted from 0 and set. And, as shown in (D) in FIG. 74, when the jackpot game is executed based on “8 round normal 2” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed eight times, The number of prize balls that can be acquired during this big hit game is 8 rounds, indicating that a total of 64 rounds of prize balls have been obtained since the limiter was set.

[Special figure low probability, first hit during non-short-time state]
Next, FIG. 75 shows a big hit from the time the limiter is set until the limiter is reached when the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a low probability state and the game state is a time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired during a game. In FIG. 74, a case is assumed in which the first hit (the big hit at the time of setting the limiter) is made during the time reduction state after the big hit game when the limiter is reached. (A) in FIG. 75 shows a gaming state at the time of winning. (B) in FIG. 75 shows the variation of the winning symbol until reaching the limiter. (C) in FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the number of jackpots and the remaining number of limiters (remaining limiter number). In FIG. 75, (D) shows the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game from the first big hit when the limiter is set until the limiter is reached (only the prize balls at the big prize opening (the prizes at the general prize opening and the start prize opening). Sphere is not included).

[First big hit (initial hit): Limiter setting (3)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 75, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a low probability state and the gaming state (in the fireworks mode) in the time shortening state. If the big hit (first win) is won and the winning symbol of the first win falls under “16 round probability variation 2”, the right for the big hit is generated four times. Further, the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state and a time shortening state, that is, to a heart zone, in the internal lottery state relating to the special symbol. Here, the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000.

  Also, as shown in (C) of FIG. 75, since the first big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is set to three. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 75, when the big hit game is executed based on the “16 round probability variation 2” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed 16 times, The number of prize balls that can be won during this big hit game is 16 rounds. In other words, it represents that the number of prize balls that can be acquired twice in the big hit in FIG. 74 is the same.

[The second big hit: Limiter subtraction (2)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 75, the gaming state before reaching the limiter, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and is in a time shortening state When winning a big hit in the middle (in the heart zone), “16 round probability variation 4” is selected as the winning symbol. Furthermore, the game state continues with the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol in a high probability state (reset to 10000 times), and the time shortened state (reset to 10000 times) continues as it is, The heart zone continues.

  Also, as shown in (C) of FIG. 75, since the second big hit game is executed, the remaining limiter count is subtracted to 2 and set. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 75, when the big hit game is executed based on the “16 round probability variation 4” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed 16 times. The number of award balls that can be obtained during this big hit game is 16 rounds, indicating that a total of 32 rounds of prize balls have been obtained since the limiter was set. In other words, it represents that the number of prize balls that can be acquired four times in the big hit in FIG. 74 is the same.

[Third big hit: Limiter subtraction (1)]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 75, the gaming state before reaching the limiter, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and is in a time shortening state When winning a big hit in the middle (in the heart zone), “16 round probability variation 4” is selected as the winning symbol. Furthermore, the game state continues with the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol in a high probability state (reset to 10000 times), and the time shortened state (reset to 10000 times) continues as it is, The heart zone continues.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75C, since the third big hit game is executed, the remaining number of limiters is subtracted to 1 and set. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 75, when the big hit game is executed based on the “16 round probability variation 4” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed 16 times. The number of award balls that can be acquired during this big hit game is 16 rounds, indicating that a total of 48 award balls have been acquired since the limiter was set. That is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained for 6 big hits in FIG. 74 is the same.

[Fourth big hit: Limiter subtraction (0): When the limiter is reached]
As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 75, when the limiter is reached, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is a high probability state, and the gaming state is in a time reduction state When winning a big hit in the middle (in the heart zone), “16 rounds normal 2” is selected as the winning symbol. Further, in the gaming state, the lottery probability state of the internal lottery regarding the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, but the time reduction state is continued, that is, the game mode is shifted to the fireworks mode. The number of time reductions is set to 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished, the time shortening state is terminated, and the gaming state is shifted to the non-time shortening state from the next variation, that is, the first normal mode is shifted. The

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), since the last fourth big hit game granted at the time of setting the limiter is executed, the remaining number of limiters is set to be subtracted from zero. And as shown in (D) in FIG. 75, when the big hit game is executed based on “16 round normal 2” of the winning symbol, the opening operation of the variable winning device is performed 16 times, The number of award balls that can be acquired during this big hit game is 16 rounds, indicating that a total of 64 rounds of prize balls have been acquired since the limiter was set. That is, the number of prize balls that can be acquired for 8 big hits in FIG. 74 is the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 above, the total number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game after the limiter reaches 0 times after the first big hit is won and the limiter is set is: It shows that it is the same (for example, 64 rounds) without depending on the game state (time reduction state or non-time reduction state) at the time of the first big hit. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is a time shortening state or a non-time shortening state, the number of award balls that can be obtained with one limiter setting is the same, so that the player feels unfair due to the difference in the number of award balls Disappears. (Note that this is not limited to the case where the winning game for the first jackpot is a 4-round probability symbol, but it is possible to give interest such as whether the jackpot game is 4 rounds or 8 rounds.)

  Here, as described above, the number of award balls that can be obtained by one limiter setting is the same (for example, 64 rounds) regardless of whether the gaming state is a time shortening state or a non-time shortening state. The number of rights you can do is different. Specifically, when the game state first hits in the non-time shortened state, the big hit for 8 times is fixed, whereas when hit for the first time in the time reduced state, the big hit for 4 times is fixed. doing. Therefore, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be varied from the time when the limiter is set and the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state until the big hit of the specified number of times (seven times or three times) is digested is different. Specifically, when the probability in the high probability state is 1/30, it is necessary to change the special symbol on the average 210 times in total before digesting the big hit game for 7 times, but for 3 times It is necessary to change the special symbol on average 90 times in total until the big hit game is consumed. That is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by one limiter setting is the same (for example, for 64 rounds) regardless of whether the gaming state is a time shortening state or a non-time shortening state, but the total number of prize balls is obtained. This means that the time required until the difference is about twice.

  In addition, when the limiter is set and the big hit is not won during 50 time reduction states (night mode), the time reduction state (night mode) is shifted to the non-time reduction state (second normal mode). . In addition, even if a big win is won during the non-time shortening state (second normal mode), the time shortening number is not set to 10000 times, but is set to 50 times, so that the non-time shortening state is entered again. There is also. Therefore, when the first big hit is in a non-time shortening state, it is preferable that the number of limiters is large. On the other hand, when the first big hit is in the time shortening state, the number of time shortening is set to 10000 times. Therefore, if the number of limiters is set as described above, it is necessary to obtain the total number of prize balls. Since the time becomes long, it is preferable that the number of limiters is small.

  In this way, the first jackpot gaming state is based on the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state, and by changing the number of limiter settings, it is possible to change the time efficiency while preventing a decrease in interest for the game, A new game characteristic can be provided to the player.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effects, reach effects, pre-reach notice effects, post-reach notice effects, big hit effects, various mode effects, etc. are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning tone control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, number of rounds command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, variation pattern There are destination judgment commands and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, when there is a movable body for presentation, the presentation control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the movable body driving IC. Although not particularly illustrated, the movable body is operated by a driving source such as a solenoid or a stepping motor, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. These drive sources such as solenoids and stepping motors can be connected to, for example, the panel illumination board 138 in FIG.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. When it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 76).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 15) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Select a previous notice pattern, a reach notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the result display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the result display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the result display effect. As a result, the result display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect) means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the result display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to the loss.

  Note that during this processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a fluctuation display of a predetermined number of fluctuations after reaching the limiter, and then after changing from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (normal state), the fireworks mode changes to the normal mode. The process which sets the production | generation which transfers to is performed. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a big hit of 8 rounds, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of 8 major roles as an effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

  Or when it corresponds to "small hit", production control CPU126 performs control which performs a mode change production, for example.

  Note that during this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect based on the winning pattern of the current jackpot as an effect to be executed at the start (opening) and end (at the ending) of the jackpot game. The contents of specific processes (opening process when the variable winning device is activated, ending process when the variable winning device is activated) will be described later with reference to different flowcharts.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 76) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 76). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display The mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but if it corresponds to big hit (4 round big hit, 8 round big hit, 16 round big hit), the production control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606. Yes (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The type of effect symbol determined here constitutes the above “hit combination” (for example, “6”-“6”-“6”). Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 78), the variation display effect and the result display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern (effect execution means). In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Opening process when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening process when the variable winning device is activated. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S801: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the winning symbol is a four-round symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the stored stop symbol command corresponds to a four-round symbol. The 4-round symbol includes a 4-round normal symbol and a 4-round probability variable symbol. As a result of this confirmation, when the winning symbol is a four-round symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S805. On the other hand, when the winning symbol is not a four-round symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S803.

  Step S803: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the winning symbol is an eight-round symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the stored stop symbol command corresponds to the 8-round symbol. The 8-round symbol includes an 8-round normal symbol and an 8-round probability variable symbol. As a result of the confirmation, if the winning symbol is an eight-round symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S807. On the other hand, when the winning symbol is not an eight-round symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S809.

  Step S805: The effect control CPU 126 executes a regular bonus big role start effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects a four-round major role opening effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, an image of a big hit opening effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  Step S807: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big bonus time big start starting effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an eight-round leading role opening effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, an image of a big hit opening effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, (A) and (B) in FIG. 45). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 determines the number of hearts to be displayed in the opening effect based on whether or not the game state is a time reduction state and the remaining number of limiters (for example, FIG. 55). The process of determining and setting the middle (j), (k), (s), (t) in FIG. 58, and (z) in FIG. 60 is also executed.

  Step S809: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big big bonus start effect selection effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round major actor opening effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, an image of a big hit opening effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, (ru), (o) in FIG. 64). Further, the effect control CPU 126, based on the number of limiters remaining at that time (limiter remaining number command), the number of hearts to be displayed in the opening effect (for example, (R), ()) in FIG. 68 (m), (u), and (y) in FIG. 70 are also determined and set.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (step S508 in FIG. 78).

[Ending process when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the ending process when the variable winning device is activated. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S811: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the winning symbol is a normal symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the stored stop symbol command corresponds to the normal symbol. The normal symbols include a 4-round normal symbol, an 8-round normal symbol, and a 16-round normal symbol. As a result of this confirmation, when the winning symbol is a normal symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S817. On the other hand, when the winning symbol is not a normal symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S813.

  Step S813: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the winning symbol is a 16-round symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the stored stop symbol command corresponds to 16 round symbols. In addition, including the previous process (step S811: No), it is confirmed in this process whether or not it is a 16-round probability variation symbol. As a result of the confirmation, if the winning symbol is a 16-round symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S819. On the other hand, when the winning symbol is not a 16-round symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S815.

  Step S815: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of times of time reduction at the time of winning is greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the stored short remaining time command, and confirms whether or not the referenced value is a value greater than zero. As a result of this confirmation, when the number of time reductions in winning is greater than 0 (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S821. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions at the time of winning is not more than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S823.

  Step S817: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks mode entry effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects the firework mode entry effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an image of the fireworks mode entry effect is displayed at the time of the big hit ending (for example, in FIG. 61 (ha), (ni), FIG. 62 (ho), FIG. 71 ( F), (ko) etc.).

  Step S819: The effect control CPU 126 executes a heart zone entry effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects a heart zone entry effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, an image of the heart zone entry effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the time of the big hit ending (for example, FIG. After the heart zone entry effect is executed, the effect is executed in a state where the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined and one heart shape is formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen. .

  Step S821: The effect control CPU 126 executes a festival mode entry effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects a festival mode entry effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, the image of the festival mode entry effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the time of the big hit ending (for example, (n), (o) in FIG. 56, (v) in FIG. 59, etc.)).

  Step S823: The effect control CPU 126 executes a night mode entry effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects the night mode entry effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, the image of the night mode entry effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the time of the big hit ending (for example, (E), (F) in FIG. 46, (G) in FIG. 47, ( b) to (d) etc.).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (step S508 in FIG. 78).

[Time reduction state setting process during production symbol stop display]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol stop display middle time reduction state setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S831: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the normal mode entry setting flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the stored normal mode entry setting flag is ON (whether the flag value is 01H).

  Here, the normal mode entry setting flag is changed when the gaming state shifts from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (normal state) or when the gaming state shifts from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state. Flag to be Specifically, when the gaming state is shifted from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state, the normal mode entry setting flag is set to ON (flag value is 01H), and the gaming state is changed from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state. When the process shifts to the normal mode entry setting flag is set to OFF (flag value is 00H). Therefore, when the first big hit is won, the gaming state is shifted from the non-time shortening state to the time shortening state, so the normal mode entry setting flag is set to ON (flag value is 01H). On the other hand, when the prescribed number of time reductions is consumed, the gaming state is shifted from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state, so the normal mode entry setting flag is set to OFF (flag value is 00H). Note that the normal mode entry setting flag is set to OFF when the gaming machine is activated.

  As a result of the confirmation, if the normal mode entry setting flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S833. On the other hand, when the normal mode entry setting flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S834.

  Step S833: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the gaming state is a time reduction state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the stored state designation command or the short time remaining number command, determines whether or not the time is shortened, and the time shortening count is 0. Check if there are too many. As a result of the confirmation, when the gaming state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S508 in FIG. 78). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the time reduction state (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S836.

  Step S834: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a time reduction state as in the previous process (step S833). As a result of the confirmation, when the gaming state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S840. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the time reduction state (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S508 in FIG. 78).

  Step S836: The effect control CPU 126 executes normal mode entry effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects a normal mode entry effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Thereby, the image of the normal mode entry effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 from the stop display effect of the effect symbol to the next change (for example, FIG. 50 (R) to FIG. 51 (T), FIG. 73 (ki)-(me) etc.). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S838.

  Step S838: The effect control CPU 126 sets the normal mode entry setting flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the normal mode entry setting flag to OFF (sets the flag value to 00H), and stores it in the flag buffer area. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display processing (step S508 in FIG. 78).

  Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 sets the normal mode entry setting flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the normal mode entry setting flag to ON (sets the flag value to 01H), and stores it in the flag buffer area. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display processing (step S508 in FIG. 78).

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In addition, the images given in the other effects are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific set values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Left start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Right start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol Display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

Lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery on the condition that a lottery opportunity has occurred during the game;
When the internal lottery is executed by the lottery execution means, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery after the symbols are variably displayed over a preset variation time;
Variable winning means for performing an opening / closing operation that changes from a closed state that disables generation of a prize to an open state that enables generation of the prize;
When the symbol is displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the symbol is variably displayed by the symbol display means and the result of the internal lottery is winning. Special game execution means for executing a special game for performing the opening / closing operation by the variable winning means until a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, a low probability state in which at least a normal winning probability is applied as a first internal state related to the winning probability of the internal lottery by the lottery executing means after the special game is ended. A probability state determining means for determining whether to set or set a high probability state to which a high winning probability is applied compared to the low probability state;
After completion of the special game by the special game execution means, the state determined by the probability state determination means is set for the first internal state, and the special symbol for the second internal state related to the occurrence frequency of the lottery trigger The lottery with a higher frequency than the non-time-reduced state in which the lottery trigger occurs at least at a normal time until the number of times of fluctuation after the special game corresponding to the number of times of the change display and stop display of A game state management means after completion of the special game, which is set to a time reduction state in which an opportunity can be generated;
After the special game, the game state management means sets the time reduction state for the second internal state, and when the post-special game variation count reaches the specific number, the time reduction state is set for the second internal state. A gaming state management means after a specific number of times of ending and setting the non-time shortening state,
When the first internal state is set to the low probability state in advance, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a win while the second internal state is set to the non-time reduction state, The determination of the first internal state by the probability state determining means is controlled so that the high probability state is continuously set until the first number of times is reached, and the high probability state is continuously determined until the first number of times. A first probability state determination control means for controlling the mode to set the low probability state after the determination to set
After the decision to set the high probability state continuously up to the first number of times for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination unit due to the control by the first probability state determination control unit As a result of the decision to set the low probability state, the first internal state is set to the low probability state by the gaming state management means after the special game ends, and the second internal state is the time When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning while the shortened state is set, the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determining means continues until the second number less than the first number is reached. The second probability state is controlled so that the high probability state is set, and after the determination of setting the high probability state is performed continuously up to the second number of times, the low probability state is controlled. And decision control means,
When the first internal state is set in advance to the low probability state and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning while the second internal state is set to the non-time reduction state, or As a result of the decision to set the high probability state for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination means due to the control by the first probability state determination control means, the game after the end of the special game If the result of the internal lottery is a win while the first internal state is set to the high probability state by the state management means, the variable prize is awarded during the special game executed by the special game execution means. First opening / closing number setting means for setting the number of times the opening / closing operation is performed by the means to the first opening / closing number;
After the decision to set the high probability state continuously up to the first number of times for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination unit due to the control by the first probability state determination control unit As a result of the decision to set the low probability state, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning while the first internal state is set to the low probability state by the gaming state management means after the special game ends. Or the result of the decision to set the high probability state for the determination of the first internal state by the probability state determination unit due to the control by the second probability state determination control unit, the special game If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning while the first internal state is set to the high probability state by the gaming state management means after the completion, the special game executing means executes A second opening and closing frequency setting means for setting the number of times that the said opening and closing operation by the variable winning device in the special game is performed in the second opening and closing times larger than the first opening and closing times that,
A gaming machine comprising: In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball when the occurrence of the winning is confirmed;
The opening / closing frequency adjusting means adjusts the number of times of the opening / closing operation, thereby paying out by the prize ball paying means during the special game executed when determined by the control by the first probability state determination control means. The total number of winning balls of the winning ball and the total number of winning balls of the winning ball to be paid out by the winning ball paying means during the special game executed when determined by the control by the second probability state determining control means And a same or approximate number of gaming machines.